Cisco Systems 1105 Automobile Parts User Manual

User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105
Wireless LAN Solution Engine
Corporate Headquarters
Cisco Systems, Inc.
170 West Tasman Drive
San Jose, CA 95134-1706
USA
http://www.cisco.com
Tel: 408 526-4000
800 553-NETS (6387)
Fax: 408 526-4100
Customer Order Number: DOC-7814092=
Text Part Number: 78-14092-01
THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION REGARDING THE PRODUCTS IN THIS MANUAL ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT
NOTICE. ALL STATEMENTS, INFORMATION, AND RECOMMENDATIONS IN THIS MANUAL ARE BELIEVED TO BE ACCURATE BUT
ARE PRESENTED WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. USERS MUST TAKE FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR
THEIR APPLICATION OF ANY PRODUCTS.
THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AND LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE ACCOMPANYING PRODUCT ARE SET FORTH IN THE INFORMATION
PACKET THAT SHIPPED WITH THE PRODUCT AND ARE INCORPORATED HEREIN BY THIS REFERENCE. IF YOU ARE UNABLE TO
LOCATE THE SOFTWARE LICENSE OR LIMITED WARRANTY, CONTACT YOUR CISCO REPRESENTATIVE FOR A COPY.
The Cisco implementation of TCP header compression is an adaptation of a program developed by the University of California, Berkeley (UCB) as
part of UCB’s public domain version of the UNIX operating system. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1981, Regents of the University of California.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER WARRANTY HEREIN, ALL DOCUMENT FILES AND SOFTWARE OF THESE SUPPLIERS ARE
PROVIDED “AS IS” WITH ALL FAULTS. CISCO AND THE ABOVE-NAMED SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THOSE OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE, OR TRADE PRACTICE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO DATA ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS MANUAL, EVEN IF CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES.
CCIP, the Cisco Powered Network mark, the Cisco Systems Verified logo, Cisco Unity, Follow Me Browsing, FormShare, Internet Quotient, iQ
Breakthrough, iQ Expertise, iQ FastTrack, the iQ Logo, iQ Net Readiness Scorecard, Networking Academy, ScriptShare, SMARTnet, TransPath,
and Voice LAN are trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc.; Changing the Way We Work, Live, Play, and Learn, Discover All That’s Possible, The Fastest
Way to Increase Your Internet Quotient, and iQuick Study are service marks of Cisco Systems, Inc.; and Aironet, ASIST, BPX, Catalyst, CCDA,
CCDP, CCIE, CCNA, CCNP, Cisco, the Cisco Certified Internetwork Expert logo, Cisco IOS, the Cisco IOS logo, Cisco Press, Cisco Systems, Cisco
Systems Capital, the Cisco Systems logo, Empowering the Internet Generation, Enterprise/Solver, EtherChannel, EtherSwitch, Fast Step, GigaStack,
IOS, IP/TV, LightStream, MGX, MICA, the Networkers logo, Network Registrar, Packet, PIX, Post-Routing, Pre-Routing, RateMUX, Registrar,
SlideCast, StrataView Plus, Stratm, SwitchProbe, TeleRouter, and VCO are registered trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the
U.S. and certain other countries.
All other trademarks mentioned in this document or Web site are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply
a partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company. (0203R)
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
Copyright ©2002, Cisco Systems, Inc.
All rights reserved.
C ON T E NT S
Preface xi
Audience xi
Conventions xi
Related Documentation xii
Obtaining Documentation xiii
World Wide Web xiii
Ordering Documentation xiv
Documentation Feedback xiv
Obtaining Technical Assistance xv
Cisco.com xv
Technical Assistance Center xv
CHAPTER
1
Getting Started with the Wireless LAN Solution Engine 1-1
Overview of the Wireless LAN Solution Engine 1-1
Date and Time Display on the WLSE 1-2
Getting Started 1-3
Logging Out 1-4
CHAPTER
2
Fault Monitoring 2-1
Displaying Faults 2-1
Viewing Fault Details 2-6
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
iii
Contents
Specifying Fault Thresholds 2-7
Setting Access Point Fault Thresholds 2-8
Setting Switch Fault Thresholds 2-10
Setting LEAP Server Response Time 2-12
Specifying Policies 2-13
Forwarding Faults 2-15
Setting Trap Notification 2-16
Setting Syslog Notification 2-17
Emailing Faults 2-18
CHAPTER
3
Configuring Devices 3-1
Using the Templates 3-1
Template Choices 3-2
Creating a Template 3-90
Copying a Template 3-91
Editing a Template 3-91
Deleting a Template 3-92
Managing Configuration Jobs 3-92
Job Choices 3-93
Creating a Configuration Job 3-99
Viewing Configuration Job Status 3-99
CHAPTER
4
Using Reports 4-1
Displaying Wireless Client Reports 4-1
Displaying a Client Detail Report 4-2
Displaying a Client Statistics Report 4-3
Displaying a Client Historical Association Report 4-5
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
iv
78-14092-01
Contents
Displaying Current Reports 4-6
Displaying a Group Report 4-7
Displaying a Group Security Report 4-9
Displaying an AP Summary Report 4-11
Displaying a Detailed Report 4-13
Displaying a Current Client Association Report 4-15
Displaying an EAP Authentication Report 4-16
Displaying a Switch Summary Report 4-17
Displaying an AP and Bridge Connected to Switch Report 4-18
Displaying a Router Summary Report 4-19
Displaying an AP and Bridge Connected to Router Report 4-20
Displaying Trends 4-21
Displaying a Group Performance Report: RF Utilization 4-22
Displaying a Group Performance Report: Ethernet Utilization 4-23
Displaying an AP and Bridge RF Transmission Statistics 4-24
Displaying an AP and Bridge Ethernet Transmission Statistics 4-25
Displaying an AP and Bridge Performance: Graph 4-26
Displaying an AP and Bridge Performance: Tabular 4-27
Exporting a Report 4-28
Emailing a Report 4-28
Scheduling Email Jobs 4-29
Viewing Email Job Details 4-31
CHAPTER
5
Performing Administrative Tasks 5-1
Using Discovery and Managing Devices 5-2
Managing Device Discovery 5-2
Managing Devices 5-13
Running Inventory Now 5-17
Setting Device Credentials 5-17
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
v
Contents
Importing Devices 5-21
Exporting Devices 5-24
Managing LEAP Servers 5-26
Managing Groups 5-28
Overview: Groups 5-28
Creating, Editing, and Deleting Groups 5-29
Managing the Appliance 5-34
Viewing WLSE Status 5-34
Managing the Software 5-37
Overview: Security 5-45
Managing Security 5-45
Backing Up and Restoring Data 5-50
Using Diagnostics 5-52
Setting Up the Splash Screen Message 5-57
Managing System Parameters 5-58
Administering Users 5-60
Managing Roles 5-60
Managing Users 5-62
Modifying Your Profile 5-65
Using Connectivity Tools 5-66
CHAPTER
6
Frequently Asked Questions 6-1
CHAPTER
7
Troubleshooting 7-1
APPENDIX
A
Naming Guidelines A-1
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
vi
78-14092-01
Contents
APPENDIX
B
Command Reference B-1
Using the CLI B-2
CLI Conventions B-2
Command Privileges B-2
Checking Command Syntax B-2
Command History Feature B-3
Help for CLI Commands B-3
Command Summary B-4
Command Description Conventions B-9
Privilege Level 0 Commands B-10
exit B-10
ping B-10
show clock B-11
show domain-name B-12
show interfaces B-13
show process B-13
show version B-14
traceroute B-15
Privilege Level 15 Commands B-16
auth B-16
backup B-17
backupconfig B-18
cdp B-19
clock B-20
df B-22
erase config B-22
firewall B-23
gethostbyname B-24
hostname B-25
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
vii
Contents
import B-25
install configure B-27
install list B-28
install update B-29
interface B-29
ip domain-name B-31
ip name-server B-32
listbackup B-33
mail B-34
mailcntrl clear B-34
mailcntrl list B-35
mailroute B-36
nslookup B-36
ntp server B-37
reload B-39
reinitdb B-40
repository B-40
repository add B-41
repository delete B-42
repository list B-43
repository server B-44
restore B-45
route B-46
services B-46
show anilog B-48
show auth-cli B-49
show auth-http B-49
show backupconfig B-50
show bootlog B-51
show cdp neighbor B-52
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
viii
78-14092-01
Contents
show cdp run B-52
show collectorlog B-53
show config B-54
show daemonslog B-55
show dmgtdlog B-56
show hseaccesslog B-57
show hseerrorlog B-58
show hsesslaccesslog B-59
show import B-59
show install logs B-60
show ipchains B-60
show hosts B-61
show maillog B-62
show proc B-62
show repository B-63
show route B-64
show securitylog B-64
show snmp-server B-66
show ssh-version B-66
show syslog B-67
show tech B-68
show telnetenable B-68
show tomcatlog B-69
shutdown B-70
snmp-server B-71
ssh B-71
ssh-version B-72
telnet B-72
telnetenable B-73
username B-74
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
ix
Contents
Maintenance Image Commands B-75
erase config B-75
fsck B-76
reload B-76
GLOSSARY
INDEX
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
x
78-14092-01
Preface
This manual describes the Wireless LAN Solution Engine and provides
instructions for using it.
Audience
This document is for system administrators responsible for managing a wireless
network who are familiar with some of the concepts and terminology of Ethernet
and wireless local area networking.
Conventions
This document uses the following conventions:
Item
Convention
Commands and keywords
boldface font
Variables for which you supply values
italic font
Displayed session and system information
screen
Information you enter
boldface screen
Variables you enter
italic screen
font
font
font
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
xi
Preface
Related Documentation
Note
Caution
Item
Convention
Menu items and button names
boldface font
Selecting a menu item
Option > Network Preferences
Means reader take note. Notes contain helpful suggestions or references to
material not covered in the publication.
Means reader be careful. In this situation, you might do something that could
result in equipment damage or loss of data.
Related Documentation
Note
Although every effort has been made to validate the accuracy of the
information in the printed and electronic documentation, you should also
review the [product] documentation on Cisco.com for any updates.
The following additional documentation is available:
Paper Documentation
•
Installation and Configuration Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wirless LAN
Solution Engine
•
Quick Start Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wirleless LAN Solution Engine
•
Release Notes for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
•
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for the CiscoWorks 1105
Wireless LAN Solution Engine
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
xii
78-14092-01
Preface
Obtaining Documentation
Online Documentation
•
Online help—Access the online help by clicking on the Help tab.
•
PDF for:
– Installation and Configuration Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wirless
LAN Solution Engine
– Quick Start Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wirleless LAN Solution
Engine
– Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for the CiscoWorks 1105
Wireless LAN Solution Engine
Note
Adobe Acrobat Reader 4.0 is required.
Obtaining Documentation
The following sections explain how to obtain documentation from Cisco Systems.
World Wide Web
You can access the most current Cisco documentation on the World Wide Web at
the following URL:
http://www.cisco.com
Translated documentation is available at the following URL:
http://www.cisco.com/public/countries_languages.shtml
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
xiii
Preface
Obtaining Documentation
Ordering Documentation
Cisco documentation is available in the following ways:
•
Registered Cisco Direct Customers can order Cisco product documentation
from the Networking Products MarketPlace:
http://www.cisco.com/cgi-bin/order/order_root.pl
•
Registered Cisco.com users can order the Documentation CD-ROM through
the online Subscription Store:
http://www.cisco.com/go/subscription
•
Nonregistered Cisco.com users can order documentation through a local
account representative by calling Cisco corporate headquarters (California,
USA) at 408 526-7208 or, elsewhere in North America, by calling
800 553-NETS (6387).
Documentation Feedback
If you are reading Cisco product documentation on Cisco.com, you can submit
technical comments electronically. Click Feedback at the top of the Cisco
Documentation home page. After you complete the form, print it out and fax it to
Cisco at 408 527-0730.
You can e-mail your comments to bug-doc@cisco.com.
To submit your comments by mail, use the response card behind the front cover
of your document, or write to the following address:
Cisco Systems
Attn: Document Resource Connection
170 West Tasman Drive
San Jose, CA 95134-9883
We appreciate your comments.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
xiv
78-14092-01
Preface
Obtaining Technical Assistance
Obtaining Technical Assistance
Cisco provides Cisco.com as a starting point for all technical assistance.
Customers and partners can obtain documentation, troubleshooting tips, and
sample configurations from online tools by using the Cisco Technical Assistance
Center (TAC) Web Site. Cisco.com registered users have complete access to the
technical support resources on the Cisco TAC Web Site.
Cisco.com
Cisco.com is the foundation of a suite of interactive, networked services that
provides immediate, open access to Cisco information, networking solutions,
services, programs, and resources at any time, from anywhere in the world.
Cisco.com is a highly integrated Internet application and a powerful, easy-to-use
tool that provides a broad range of features and services to help you to
•
Streamline business processes and improve productivity
•
Resolve technical issues with online support
•
Download and test software packages
•
Order Cisco learning materials and merchandise
•
Register for online skill assessment, training, and certification programs
You can self-register on Cisco.com to obtain customized information and service.
To access Cisco.com, go to the following URL:
http://www.cisco.com
Technical Assistance Center
The Cisco TAC is available to all customers who need technical assistance with a
Cisco product, technology, or solution. Two types of support are available through
the Cisco TAC: the Cisco TAC Web Site and the Cisco TAC Escalation Center.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
xv
Preface
Obtaining Technical Assistance
Inquiries to Cisco TAC are categorized according to the urgency of the issue:
•
Priority level 4 (P4)—You need information or assistance concerning Cisco
product capabilities, product installation, or basic product configuration.
•
Priority level 3 (P3)—Your network performance is degraded. Network
functionality is noticeably impaired, but most business operations continue.
•
Priority level 2 (P2)—Your production network is severely degraded,
affecting significant aspects of business operations. No workaround is
available.
•
Priority level 1 (P1)—Your production network is down, and a critical impact
to business operations will occur if service is not restored quickly. No
workaround is available.
Which Cisco TAC resource you choose is based on the priority of the problem and
the conditions of service contracts, when applicable.
Cisco TAC Web Site
The Cisco TAC Web Site allows you to resolve P3 and P4 issues yourself, saving
both cost and time. The site provides around-the-clock access to online tools,
knowledge bases, and software. To access the Cisco TAC Web Site, go to the
following URL:
http://www.cisco.com/tac
All customers, partners, and resellers who have a valid Cisco services contract
have complete access to the technical support resources on the Cisco TAC Web
Site. The Cisco TAC Web Site requires a Cisco.com login ID and password. If you
have a valid service contract but do not have a login ID or password, go to the
following URL to register:
http://www.cisco.com/register/
If you cannot resolve your technical issues by using the Cisco TAC Web Site, and
you are a Cisco.com registered user, you can open a case online by using the TAC
Case Open tool at the following URL:
http://www.cisco.com/tac/caseopen
If you have Internet access, it is recommended that you open P3 and P4 cases
through the Cisco TAC Web Site.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
xvi
78-14092-01
Preface
Obtaining Technical Assistance
Cisco TAC Escalation Center
The Cisco TAC Escalation Center addresses issues that are classified as priority
level 1 or priority level 2; these classifications are assigned when severe network
degradation significantly impacts business operations. When you contact the TAC
Escalation Center with a P1 or P2 problem, a Cisco TAC engineer will
automatically open a case.
To obtain a directory of toll-free Cisco TAC telephone numbers for your country,
go to the following URL:
http://www.cisco.com/warp/public/687/Directory/DirTAC.shtml
Before calling, please check with your network operations center to determine the
level of Cisco support services to which your company is entitled; for example,
SMARTnet, SMARTnet Onsite, or Network Supported Accounts (NSA). In
addition, please have available your service agreement number and your product
serial number.
The Cisco TAC Escalation Center addresses issues that are classified as priority
level 1 or priority level 2; these classifications are assigned when severe network
degradation significantly impacts business operations. When you contact the TAC
Escalation Center with a P1 or P2 problem, a Cisco TAC engineer will
automatically open a case.
To obtain a directory of toll-free Cisco TAC telephone numbers for your country,
go to the following URL:
http://www.cisco.com/warp/public/687/Directory/DirTAC.shtml
Before calling, please check with your network operations center to determine the
level of Cisco support services to which your company is entitled; for example,
SMARTnet, SMARTnet Onsite, or Network Supported Accounts (NSA). In
addition, please have available your service agreement number and your product
serial number.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
xvii
Preface
Obtaining Technical Assistance
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
xviii
78-14092-01
C H A P T E R
1
Getting Started with the Wireless LAN
Solution Engine
The following topics provide an overview of the Wireless LAN Solution Engine
(WLSE) and assistance in getting started:
•
Overview of the Wireless LAN Solution Engine, page 1-1
•
Date and Time Display on the WLSE, page 1-2
•
Getting Started, page 1-3
•
Logging Out, page 1-4
Overview of the Wireless LAN Solution Engine
The WLSE is a hardware and software solution for managing Cisco wireless
devices. The WLSE has the following major features:
•
Configuration
Allows you to apply a set of configuration changes to a group of access points
and connected switch ports.
•
Reporting
Allows you to display reports for tracking device, client and security
information. Reports can be emailed, printed, or exported.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
1-1
Chapter 1
Getting Started with the Wireless LAN Solution Engine
Date and Time Display on the WLSE
•
Fault and Policy Monitoring
Provides device monitoring for fault and performance conditions, monitoring
of LEAP server responses, and monitoring of policy misconfigurations.
The WLSE works by gathering fault, performance, and configuration information
about the Cisco wireless devices that it discovers in your network. The WLSE
allows you to manage the discovered devices. You can customize configuration
templates and apply them, display reports on managed devices and wireless
clients, and monitor device faults.
When you log in to the WLSE, a dashboard appears with the following tabs:
Tab
Allows you to ...
See...
Faults
Display device faults, specify fault thresholds,
specify policies, and enable syslog and traps.
Fault Monitoring, page 2-1.
Configure
Create and apply configuration templates and
manage jobs.
Configuring Devices,
page 3-1.
Reports
Run, view and email reports.
Using Reports, page 4-1.
Administration
Perform administrative tasks such as
discovering devices, managing user profiles,
and managing the appliance.
Performing Administrative
Tasks, page 5-1.
Date and Time Display on the WLSE
The WLSE uses browser (client) time in most of its displays. The format of
timestamps depends on the browser you are using:
•
In Internet Explorer, the timestamp is date, tim (hours:minutes:seconds),
timezone, and year; for example:
Mon Mar 25 13:29:21 PST 2002
•
In Netscape Navigator, the timestamp is date, time (hours:minutes:seconds),
offset from GMT/UTC, timezone, and year; for example:
Mon Mar 25 13:29:21 GMT-0800 (Pacific Standard Time) 2002
In some WLSE tables, the timestamp is hours:minutes:seconds month/day/year;
for example, 19:23:44 06/29/2002. The time is browser (client) time.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
1-2
78-14092-01
Chapter 1
Getting Started with the Wireless LAN Solution Engine
Getting Started
The WLSE’s system time is Universal Coordinated Time (UTC), and UTC is used
in certain displays, such as the Discovery Run Log. To display or reset the system
time, see the instructions in the Hardware Installation and Configuration Guide
for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine.
Getting Started
Before you can use WLSE monitoring, configuration, and reporting, you must set
up your devices, initiate discovery, and move devices into the managed state. To
get started, follow the directions in the Quick Start Guide or use the following
task list.
Task
Description and References
1. Set up devices (access points,
bridges, routers, switches, and LEAP
servers).
See Set Up Devices, page 5-4 for details.
2. Log in to the WLSE using a Web
browser.
Enter the WLSE’s IP address, followed by:1741; for
example, http://209.165.202.128:1741.
3. Enter device credentials.
Device community strings must be entered on the
WLSE. See Setting Device Credentials, page 5-17.
For access point configuration tasks, the HTTP
username and password must be entered on the WLSE.
See Specify the HTTP Username and Password,
page 5-20.
4. Initiate discovery from the WLSE If you are using discovery from the WLSE, add seed
or import devices from a file or from devices and enable discovery. You can initiate an
CiscoWorks.
immediate one-time discovery or schedule discovery for
a later time. See Managing Device Discovery, page 5-2.
5. Verify the discovery.
On the WLSE, verify that devices were discovered. See
View Discovery History and Status, page 5-12.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
1-3
Chapter 1
Getting Started with the Wireless LAN Solution Engine
Logging Out
Task
Description and References
6. Set device state to “managed” and You must move devices to the managed state on the
run inventory polling.
WLSE before you can use configuration, reporting, and
monitoring features. After moving devices to the
managed state, you should perform an immediate
inventory polling to obtain device information needed to
use such WLSE features as reports and automatic
grouping. See Using Discovery and Managing Devices,
page 5-2.
7. Create other users and user roles as The WLSE has one predefined user (the system
needed.
administrator) and four predefined user roles. User roles
are used to specify the WLSE functions a given user can
have access to. To allow other users access to the WLSE,
the system administrator must add users. The system
administrator can also create roles to customize user
access. SeeAdministering Users, page 5-60.
Logging Out
To log out from the WLSE, click Logout in the upper right corner of the window.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
1-4
78-14092-01
2
C H A P T E R
Fault Monitoring
The Faults tab displays information to help you monitor your devices. All the
device information shown under this tab is polled from the devices in your
network.
Following are the subtabs under Faults:
Note
Some of the subtabs may not be visible to some users.
•
Display Faults—See Displaying Faults, page 2-1
•
Specify Fault Thresholds—See Specifying Fault Thresholds, page 2-7
•
Specify Policies—See Specifying Policies, page 2-13
•
Fault Forwarding—See Forwarding Faults, page 2-15
Displaying Faults
This window displays device fault information. A fault is an abnormal condition
that occurs when a system component exceeds a performance threshold or is not
functioning properly. (See Specifying Fault Thresholds, page 2-7 to set threshold
levels.)
A fault can also occur when a system policy is violated. (See Specifying Policies,
page 2-13 to set policies.)
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
2-1
Chapter 2
Fault Monitoring
Displaying Faults
Displayed fault information is retained by default for 30 days. To change the
default, see Managing System Parameters, page 5-58.
Note
Your login determines whether you can use this option.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Faults > Display Faults. The Fault window appears.
Step 2
Use the Filter: bar to display the faults you want to view:
Table 2-1
Display Faults Filter Bar
Field
Description
Devices
From the list, select the device type
whose fault summary you want to
display.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
2-2
78-14092-01
Chapter 2
Fault Monitoring
Displaying Faults
Table 2-1
Display Faults Filter Bar (continued)
Field
Description
Severity
From the list, select the severity from
P1, which is the highest severity level
to P5, which is the lowest severity
level, to display:
State
•
P1—Severity P1 faults.
•
P1-P2—Severity P1 and P2 faults.
•
P1-P3—Severity P1 through P3
faults.
•
P1-P4—Severity P1 through P4
faults.
•
P1-P5—Severity P1 through P5
faults.
•
All—Severity P1 through P5
faults, and faults that have been
cleared.
From the list, select a states to display:
•
All—Faults in all states are
displayed.
•
Active—Faults are active (current)
and have not been acknowledged.
•
Acknowledged—Faults that are
active and have been
acknowledged.
•
Cleared—Faults that have been
cleared (no longer in an Active or
Acknowledged state).
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
2-3
Chapter 2
Fault Monitoring
Displaying Faults
Step 3
Click Apply. The following table appears:
Note
If no data is displayed in the table, there are no faults for your filtering
selection to report.
Table 2-2
Display Faults Table
Column
Description
IP Address
The device IP address.
Click to see the device’s summary
report. For:
Hostname
•
Access Points— see Displaying an
AP Summary Report, page 4-11.
•
Switches— see Displaying a
Switch Summary Report,
page 4-17.
•
Routers— see Displaying a Router
Summary Report, page 4-19.
The device for which the fault is
reported.
Click to see the device’s summary
report. For:
•
Access Points— see Displaying an
AP Summary Report, page 4-11.
•
Switches— see Displaying a
Switch Summary Report,
page 4-17.
•
Routers— see Displaying a Router
Summary Report, page 4-19.
Family
The product family.
Product
The product name.
Type
The device or the sub-device
component.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
2-4
78-14092-01
Chapter 2
Fault Monitoring
Displaying Faults
Table 2-2
Display Faults Table (continued)
Column
Description
Description
A description of the fault.
Click to see fault details. See Viewing
Fault Details, page 2-6.
Severity
The fault severity level.
State
The operational state of the device.
Timestamp
Indicates the time, based on the client
browser, that the state of the device last
changed. See Date and Time Display
on the WLSE, page 1-2.
Click to see fault details. See Viewing
Fault Details, page 2-6.
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
To sort table data, click on the column heading you want to use to sort the data:
•
A triangle indicates ascending order.
•
An upside-down triangle indicates descending order.
•
No triangle indicates that the data is not sorted.
To acknowledge (change the state from Active to Acknowledged):
•
A single fault, check it, then click Acknowledge.
•
All faults, click Select All, then click Acknowledge.
To unacknowledge (change the state from Acknowledged to Active):
•
A single fault, check it, then click Unacknowledged.
•
All faults, click Select All, then click Unacknowledged.
Related Topics
•
Specifying Fault Thresholds, page 2-7
•
Specifying Policies, page 2-13
•
Forwarding Faults, page 2-15
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
2-5
Chapter 2
Fault Monitoring
Displaying Faults
Viewing Fault Details
The following tables are displayed in the Fault Details window.
To sort table data, click on the column heading you want to use to sort the data:
•
A triangle indicates ascending order.
•
An upside-down triangle indicates descending order.
•
No triangle indicates that the data is not sorted.
Fault details for
Column
Description
IP
The device IP address.
Name
The device hostname.
Family
The device family.
Product
The product name.
Type
The device or the device sub-entity
(which could include a logical entity,
such as software or a service) in which
the fault is found.
Note
If the Type is a sub-entity,
additional columns appear
with keys and values to help
identify the precise
sub-entity. These additional
keys and values are MIB
variables.
Conditions
Column
Description
Name
The fault condition.
State
The state of the device.
Severity
The fault severity level.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
2-6
78-14092-01
Chapter 2
Fault Monitoring
Specifying Fault Thresholds
Column
Description
Description
A description of the fault.
Timestamp
Indicates the time, based on the client
browser, that the state of the device last
changed.
See Date and Time Display on the
WLSE, page 1-2.
Fault History
Column
Description
State
The state of the device.
Severity
The fault severity level.
Description
A description of the fault.
Change
A description of the state change.
Timestamp
Indicates the time, based on the client
browser, that the state of the device last
changed.
See Date and Time Display on the
WLSE, page 1-2.
By
Displays the username of the person
who changed the fault state.
If the fault state has not been
acknowledged, nothing is displayed in
this column.
Specifying Fault Thresholds
This window allows you to set polling and exception threshold values collected
from the devices you are monitoring.
The threshold values you set in this window will determine how the faults are
displayed in the Faults > Display Faults subtab.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
2-7
Chapter 2
Fault Monitoring
Specifying Fault Thresholds
Note
Your login determines whether you can use this option.
The Specify Fault Threshold window has the following options:
•
Access Point—See Setting Access Point Fault Thresholds, page 2-8.
•
Switch—See Setting Switch Fault Thresholds, page 2-10.
•
LEAP—See Setting LEAP Server Response Time, page 2-12.
Related Topics
•
Displaying Faults, page 2-1
•
Specifying Policies, page 2-13
•
Forwarding Faults, page 2-15
Setting Access Point Fault Thresholds
Using this option, you can set up thresholds for access point faults. When the
thresholds are exceeded, faults are generated and can be viewed under Faults >
Display Faults.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Faults > Specify Fault Thresholds. The Fault threshold window appears.
Step 2
Select Access Point in the left pane and the menu expands.
Step 3
Select any of the following to set values for:
•
SNMP Reachable—Go to Step 4.
•
RF port status—Go to Step 4.
•
RF port utilization—Go to Step 6.
•
RF port packet errors—Go to Step 6.
•
RF port WEP errors—Go to Step 6.
•
RF port FCS errors—Go to Step 6.
•
Ethernet port status—Go to Step 4.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
2-8
78-14092-01
Chapter 2
Fault Monitoring
Specifying Fault Thresholds
Step 4
•
Ethernet port utilization—Go to Step 6.
•
Ethernet port packet errors—Go to Step 6.
Complete the following:
Field
Description
Enable
Check to enable a threshold for this component.
Polling Interval
From the list, select the polling interval.
Settings
Down
From the list, select the severity level and the
number of polling cycles before the status is
Down.
Up
From the list, select the number of polling
cycles before the fault is cleared and the status
is Up.
Step 5
Continue to Step 7.
Step 6
Complete the following:
Field
Description
Enable
Check to enable a threshold for this
component.
Polling Interval
From the list, select the polling
interval.
Settings
Overloaded
From the list, select the severity level,
the percentage, and the number of
polling cycles before the status is
Overloaded.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
2-9
Chapter 2
Fault Monitoring
Specifying Fault Thresholds
Step 7
Field
Description
Degraded
From the list, select the severity level,
the percentage, and the number of
polling cycles before the status is
Degraded.
OK
From the list, select the severity level,
the percentage, and the number of
polling cycles before the status is OK.
Click Reset to refresh any fields you have changed but want to restore, or Apply
to set the new entries.
Setting Switch Fault Thresholds
Using this option, you can set up thresholds for switch faults. When the thresholds
are exceeded, faults are generated and can be viewed under Faults > Display
Faults.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Faults > Specify Fault Threshold. The Fault threshold window appears.
Step 2
Select Switch in the left pane and the menu expands.
Step 3
Select any of the following to set values for:
Step 4
•
SNMP Reachable —Go to Step 4.
•
CPU utilization—Go to Step 6.
•
Memory utilization—Go to Step 6.
•
Port Status—Go to Step 4.
•
Port Utilization—Go to Step 6.
•
Module Status—Step 4.
Complete the following:
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
2-10
78-14092-01
Chapter 2
Fault Monitoring
Specifying Fault Thresholds
Field
Enable
Polling Interval
Settings
Down
Up
Step 5
Go to step Step 7.
Step 6
Complete the following:
Description
Check to enable a threshold for this component.
From the list, select the polling interval.
From the list, select the severity level and the
number of polling cycles before the status is
Down.
From the list, select the number of polling
cycles before the fault is cleared and the status
is Up.
Field
Description
Enable
Check to enable a threshold for this component.
Polling Interval
From the list, select the polling interval.
Settings
Step 7
Overloaded
From the list, select the severity level, the
percentage, and the number of polling cycles
before the status is Overloaded.
Degraded
From the list, select the severity level, the
percentage, and the number of polling cycles
before the status is Degraded.
OK
From the list, select the severity level, the
percentage, and the number of polling cycles
before the status is OK.
Click Reset to refresh any fields you have changed but want to restore, or Apply
to set the new entries.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
2-11
Chapter 2
Fault Monitoring
Specifying Fault Thresholds
Setting LEAP Server Response Time
Using this option, you can set up a threshold for LEAP server response time.
When the threshold is exceeded, a fault is generated and can be viewed under
Faults > Display Faults.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Faults > Specify Fault Threshold. The LEAP Server:Response Time
threshold window appears.
Step 2
Select LEAP in the left pane and the menu expands.
Step 3
Complete the following:
Field
Enable
Polling Interval
Settings
Overloaded
Degraded
OK
Step 4
Description
Check to enable a threshold for this component.
From the list, select the polling interval.
From the list, select the severity level, the
response time, and the number of polling cycles
before the status is Overloaded.
From the list, select the severity level, the
response time, and the number of polling cycles
before the status is Degraded.
From the list, select the severity level, the
response time, and the number of polling cycles
before the status is OK.
Click Reset to refresh any fields you have changed but want to restore, or Apply
to set the new entries.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
2-12
78-14092-01
Chapter 2
Fault Monitoring
Specifying Policies
Specifying Policies
This is window allows you to activate or deactivate a set of pre-defined policies
for access points.
The policies you set in this window will determine how some of the faults are
displayed in the Faults > Display Faults subtab.
Note
Your login determines whether you can use this option.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Faults > Specify Policies. The Access Point window appears.
Step 2
In the left pane, select the variable for which you want to set a policy.
Step 3
•
SSID—Go to Step 3
•
Broadcast SSID Disabled—Go to Step 6
•
WEP Enabled—Go to Step 6
•
LEAP Enabled—Go to Step 6
•
WEP Key Length—Go to Step 8
•
HTTP Disabled—Go to Step 6
•
Telnet Disabled—Go to Step 6
•
User Manager Enforced—Go to Step 6
•
HTTP Authentication—Go to Step 6
To activate the policy, do the following:
Field
Description
Verify
Check if you want to verify that SSID is
enabled.
Polling Interval
From the list, select the polling interval.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
2-13
Chapter 2
Fault Monitoring
Specifying Policies
Field
Description
Severity
From the list, select a severity level to associate
with this policy.
Enter ssid
Enter the unique identifier used by client
devices to associate with the access point. Any
alphanumeric character up to 32 characters
long.
Step 4
Click Add to add the SSID to the list, then go to Step 9.
Step 5
To remove an SSID from the list, select it, click Remove, then go to Step 9.
Step 6
Complete the following:
Step 7
Field
Description
Verify
Check if you want to verify one of the
following:
•
Broadcast SSID is disabled
•
WEP is enabled
•
LEAP is enabled
•
HTTP is disabled
•
Telnet is disabled
•
User Manager Capabilities are enforced
•
HTTP authentication
Polling Interval
From the list, select the polling interval.
Severity
From the list, select a severity level to associate
with this policy.
Go to Step 9.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
2-14
78-14092-01
Chapter 2
Fault Monitoring
Forwarding Faults
Step 8
Step 9
Complete the following:
Field
Description
Verify
Check if you want to verify the WEP key length.
Polling Interval
From the list, select the polling interval.
Severity
From the list, select a severity level to associate
with this policy.
WEP Key Length
Select to indicate the bit length.
Click Reset to refresh any fields you have changed but want to restore, or Apply
to set the new entries.
Related Topics
•
Displaying Faults, page 2-1
•
Specifying Fault Thresholds, page 2-7
•
Forwarding Faults, page 2-15
Forwarding Faults
This window allows you to set SNMP traps to enable north-bound exception
notification to specified hosts, issue syslog messages to selected syslog servers,
and send exception notification email to selected users.
This section has the following options:
Note
•
Setting Trap Notification
•
Setting Syslog Notification
•
Emailing Faults
Your login determines whether you can use this option.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
2-15
Chapter 2
Fault Monitoring
Forwarding Faults
Related Topics
•
Displaying Faults, page 2-1
•
Specifying Fault Thresholds, page 2-7
•
Specifying Policies, page 2-13
Setting Trap Notification
This option allows you to enable the WLSE to send north-bound exception
notification to one or more SNMP trap receivers. The exception notification
contains information such as device name and IP, fault number, timestamp,
exception severity, and a message describing the problem.
Before You Begin
Make sure your SNMP trap receiver’s trap receiving daemon is set to the correct
port. The default port is set to 162.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Faults > Fault Forwarding. The Fault Forwarding dialog box appears.
Step 2
Complete the following:
Step 3
Field
Description
Trap
Check to enable trap notification.
Port
Enter the port number if different from the
default of 162.
Host
Enter the hostname/IP of the SNMP trap
receiver to which you want to send SNMP trap
notification.
Community
Enter the community string.
If you want a different host to receive trap notification, click add row. There is no
limit to the number you can enter.
To delete a row, click delete, next to the row you want to remove.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
2-16
78-14092-01
Chapter 2
Fault Monitoring
Forwarding Faults
Step 4
Click Reset to refresh any fields you have changed but want to restore, or Apply
to save your settings.
Related Topics
•
Setting Syslog Notification, page 2-17
•
Emailing Faults, page 2-18
Setting Syslog Notification
This option allows you to send syslog messages to selected syslog servers. The
messages contain information such as device name and IP, fault number, date and
time, exception severity, and a message about what is wrong.
Before You Begin
Make sure your syslog server is turned on to be able to receive messages from the
Wireless LAN Solution Engine. Also make sure that the receiving process is
configured to receive messages from remote hosts (for example, start syslogd with
-r option on some unix versions).
Procedure
Step 1
Select Faults > Fault Forwarding. The Fault Forwarding dialog box appears.
Step 2
Complete the following:
Field
Description
Syslog
Check to send syslog messages to designated
syslog servers.
Enter Syslog host names
Enter the hostname/IP for the syslog servers.
Names must be separated by a space, a comma,
a semicolon, or a new line.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
2-17
Chapter 2
Fault Monitoring
Forwarding Faults
Step 3
Click Reset to refresh any fields you have changed but want to restore, or Apply
to save your settings.
Related Topics
•
Setting Trap Notification, page 2-16
•
Emailing Faults, page 2-18
Emailing Faults
The emailed exception notification contains information such as device name and
IP, fault number, exception severity, and a message about what is wrong
Procedure
Step 1
Select Faults > Fault Forwarding. The Fault Forwarding dialog box appears.
Step 2
Complete the following:
Field
Description
Email
Check to enable email notification of exception
information.
Enter email addresses
Enter the email addresses of users you want to
receive exception notification.
Addresses must be separated by a space, a
comma, a semicolon, or a new line.
Priority
From the list, select the priority of the
exceptions you want these uses to receive.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
2-18
78-14092-01
Chapter 2
Fault Monitoring
Forwarding Faults
Step 3
If you want a different group of users to receive different priority level exceptions,
click add row to add another set of email addresses. There is no limit to the
number of email addresses you can enter.
Step 4
Click Reset to refresh any fields you have changed but want to restore, or Apply
to save your settings.
Related Topics
•
Setting Trap Notification, page 2-16
•
Setting Syslog Notification, page 2-17
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
2-19
Chapter 2
Fault Monitoring
Forwarding Faults
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
2-20
78-14092-01
C H A P T E R
3
Configuring Devices
The Configure tab allows you to view, create, copy, edit, and delete configuration
templates and apply them to large numbers of devices at a time.It also allows you
to schedule a configuration job and to check on the job’s status.
Following are the subtabs under Configure:
Note
Some of the subtabs may not be visible to some users.
•
Templates—See Using the Templates, page 3-1.
•
Jobs—See Managing Configuration Jobs, page 3-92.
Using the Templates
This is window allows you to create, modify, and delete configuration templates.
The topics covered in this section are:
•
Creating a Template, page 3-90
•
Copying a Template, page 3-91
•
Editing a Template, page 3-91
•
Deleting a Template, page 3-92
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-1
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Related Topic
Managing Configuration Jobs, page 3-92
Template Choices
Note
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any entries
you have made in other Template windows up until that point.
When you create or edit a configuration template, the following choices appear in
the left pane of the Templates window:
1.
Template Name—See Naming the Template, page 3-3.
2.
Template Categories
Note
Any or all of the template categories can be completed in any order.
– Express Template—See Using Express Template, page 3-3.
– Association—See Setting Up Association, page 3-7.
– Ethernet—See Configuring the Ethernet Port, page 3-31.
– Radio—See Configuring the Radio, page 3-36.
– Security—See Defining the Security Settings, page 3-51.
– Services—See Configuring Services, page 3-60.
– Events—See Configuring Events, page 3-79.
– Custom Values—See Configuring Custom Values, page 3-85.
3.
Preview—See Previewing the Template, page 3-89.
4.
Finish—See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-2
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Naming the Template
This option enables to you to name the template.
Procedure
Note
Step 1
Clicking Clear removes all the entries you have made.
Select Template Name. The Template Name dialog box appears:
Field
Name
Description
Description
Enter a name for the template.
See Naming Guidelines, page A-1.
Enter a description of the purpose of the
template.
See Naming Guidelines, page A-1
Step 2
Select a template category. (For additional information, see Template Categories,
page 3-2.)
Using Express Template
Use this option if you need to set up an access point quickly with a simple
configuration. This will allow you to enter all the access point's essential settings
for basic operation.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-3
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Procedure
Step 1
Select Express Template. The Express dialog box displays in the right pane:
Note
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.
Table 3-1
Express Template Settings
Field
Description
Configuration Server Protocol
Set this entry to match the network’s method
of IP address assignment.
From the list, select one of the following
options:
Default Subnet Mask
•
None-Static IP—Use this if your
network does not have an automatic
system for IP address assignment.
•
BOOTP—Use this if your network uses
Bootstrap Protocol, in which IP
addresses are hard-coded based on MAC
addresses.
•
DHCP—Use this if your network uses
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol,
in which IP addresses are “leased” for
predetermined periods of time.
Enter an IP subnet mask to identify the
subnetwork so the IP address can be
recognized on the LAN.
If DHCP or BOOTP is not enabled, this field
is the subnet mask.
If DHCP or BOOTP is enabled, this field
provides the subnet mask only if no server
responds to the access point's DHCP or
BOOTP request.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-4
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Table 3-1
Express Template Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Default Gateway
Enter the IP address of your default Internet
gateway.
The entry 255.255.255.255 indicates no
gateway.
Radio Service Set ID (SSID)
Enter a unique identifier client devices use to
associate with the access point. It can be any
alphanumeric, case-sensitive string, from 2
to 32 characters long.
Several access points on a network or
sub-network can share an SSID.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-5
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Table 3-1
Express Template Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Role in Network
From the list, select one of the following:
•
Access Point—Use this setting if the
access point is connected to the wired
LAN.
•
Repeater—Use this setting for access
points not connected to the wired LAN.
•
Survey Client—Use this setting when
performing a site survey for a repeater
access point. When you select this
setting, clients are not allowed to
associate and the bridge's STP function
is disabled.
•
Root Bridge—Use this setting to set a
bridge as the root bridge. (One bridge in
each group of bridges must be set as the
root bridge). The root bridge cannot
associate with another root bridge.
•
Non-Root Bridge w/ Client—Use this
setting for non-root bridges that accept
associations from client devices and for
bridges acting as repeaters. A non-root
bridge will only associate to another
bridge (root or non-root).
•
Non-Root Bridge w/o Client—Use this
setting for non-root bridges that should
not accept associations from client
devices. A non-root bridge (without
clients) can connect to a wired LAN and
only associates to another bridge (root or
non-root).
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-6
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Table 3-1
Express Template Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Ensure Compatibility with Cisco From the list, select one of the following:
Ensure Compatibility with
2MB/sec Clients
Step 2
•
Enable—Use this setting to
automatically configure the device to be
compatible with other Cisco devices on
your wireless LAN.
•
Disable—Use this setting to not
automatically configure the device to be
compatible with other Cisco devices on
your wireless LAN.
From the list, select one of the following:
•
Enable— Use this setting to operate at a
maximum speed of two megabits per
second.
•
Disable—Use this setting if you do not
want devices to operate at a maximum
speed of two megabits per second.
Select one of the following:
•
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the
Template, page 3-89.)
•
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)
•
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template
Categories, page 3-2.)
Setting Up Association
Use this option to set up spanning tree protocol (STP) on bridges and to set up
filtering to control the flow of data through the access point.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-7
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Procedure
Step 1
Select Association. The menu expands and the Association dialog box displays in
the right pane.
Step 2
Select one of the following from the Association menu:
•
Spanning Tree—Defining Spanning Tree Protocol, page 3-8.
•
Address Filters—Defining Address Filters, page 3-11.
•
Ethertype Filters—Defining Ethertype Filters, page 3-12.
•
IP Protocol Filters—Defining IP Protocol Filters, page 3-16.
•
IP Port Filters—Defining IP Port Filters, page 3-21.
•
Advanced—Defining Advanced Associations, page 3-25.
•
Port Assignments—Configuring Port Assignments, page 3-30.
Defining Spanning Tree Protocol
This option is used for only bridges.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Association > Spanning Tree. The Association: Spanning Tree Protocol
dialog box appears.
Step 2
Click see details for information on which bridges this configuration is valid.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-8
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Step 3
Complete the following:
Note
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.
Table 3-2
Spanning Tree Protocol Settings
Field
Description
Spanning Tree Protocol
(STP)
From the list, select one of the following:
•
Enable—Use this setting to enable STP on the
bridge.
•
Disable—If you do not want STP enabled the
bridge.
Root Configuration
Priority (0-65535)
Enter a number to influence which bridge is
designated the root bridge in the spanning tree.
When bridges have the same priority setting, STP
uses the bridges’ MAC addresses as a tiebreaker.
The bridge with the lowest priority setting is likely
to be designated the root bridge in the tree.
Max Age (6-40 Seconds) Enter the number of seconds to define how long the
bridge waits before deciding the network has
changed and the spanning tree needs to be rebuilt.
For example, with Max Age set to 20, the bridge
attempts to rebuild the spanning tree if it does not
receive a hello BDPU from the root bridge in the
spanning tree within 20 seconds.
Hello Time (1-10
Seconds)
Enter the number of seconds to define how often the
root bridge in the spanning tree sends out a hello
BPDU telling the other bridges that the network
topology has not changed and that the spanning tree
should remain the same.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-9
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Table 3-2
Spanning Tree Protocol Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Forward Delay (4-30
Seconds)
Enter the number of seconds to define how long the
bridge’s ports should stay in the listening and
learning transition states if there is a change in the
spanning tree.
Port Configuration
Path Cost (1-65535)
Enter a number to indicates the relative efficiency of
a port’s network link.
A port with a high path cost is less likely to become
a bridge's root port.
Priority (0-255)
Enter a number to influence whether STP designates
a port as a bridge's root port.
A port with a low priority setting is more likely to
become a bridge's root port.
Enable
Step 4
From the list, select one of the following for each
port configured:
•
Enable—Use this setting to indicate whether the
port participates in STP. (This determines
whether the port blocks or forwards traffic.)
•
Disable—Use this setting to indicate that the
port does not participate in STP.
Select one of the following:
•
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the
Template, page 3-89.)
•
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)
•
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template
Categories, page 3-2.)
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-10
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Defining Address Filters
Using this option, you can:
•
Create a MAC address filter
•
Remove a MAC address filter
Procedure
Step 1
Select Association > Address Filters. The Association: Address Filters dialog
box appears.
Step 2
To add a new MAC address filter complete the following fields:
Note
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.
Field
Description
New Destination
MAC Address
Enter a destination MAC address by entering the
address in one of the following ways:
•
With colons separating the character pairs
(00:40:96:12:34:56, for example)
•
Without any intervening characters
(004096123456, for example)
Allowed
Click to pass traffic to the MAC address.
Disallowed
Click to discard traffic to the MAC address.
Step 3
Click Add to add the MAC address to the Current MAC Address Filters list.
Step 4
To remove a MAC Address, select it from the Current MAC Address Filters list,
then click Remove.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-11
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Step 5
Select one of the following:
•
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the
Template, page 3-89.)
•
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)
•
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template
Categories, page 3-2.)
Defining Ethertype Filters
Procedure
Step 1
Select Association > Ethertype Filters. The Association: Ethertype Filters
dialog box appears.
Step 2
Using this option:
•
Create new filters—See Creating New Ethertype Filters, page 3-12.
•
Delete the Filters—See Deleting Ethertype Filters, page 3-14.
Using this option you can also:
•
Create Special Cases —See Creating Special Cases, page 3-14.
•
Delete Special Cases—See Deleting Special Cases, page 3-16.
Creating New Ethertype Filters
Procedure
Step 1
To create and enable protocol filters for the access point’s Ethernet port, enter the
following:
Table 3-3
Field
Creating New Ethertype Filters Settings
Description
Add New Ethertype Filter
Set ID
Enter an identification number for the filter set.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-12
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Table 3-3
Creating New Ethertype Filters Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Set Name
Enter a descriptive filter set name.
See Naming Guidelines, page A-1.
Default Disposition
From the list, select one of the following:
•
Forward—Use this setting to forward protocol
traffic.
•
Block—Use this setting to block protocol traffic.
Default Time to Live (msec)
unicast
Enter the number of milliseconds unicast packets
should stay in the access point’s buffer before they are
discarded.
multicast
Enter the number of milliseconds multicast packets
should stay in the access point’s buffer before they are
discarded.
Step 2
Click Add. The new name is added to the Ethertype Filters list.
Step 3
Select one of the following:
•
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the
Template, page 3-89.)
•
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)
•
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template
Categories, page 3-2.)
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-13
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Deleting Ethertype Filters
Procedure
Step 1
To delete protocol filters for the access point's Ethernet port, select the set name
from the Current Ethertype Filters list, then click Delete.
Step 2
Select one of the following:
•
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the
Template, page 3-89.)
•
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)
•
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template
Categories, page 3-2.)
Creating Special Cases
Procedure
Step 1
Select the default filter for which you want to define a special case.
Step 2
Enter the following:
Table 3-4
Ethertype Filter Special Cases Settings
Field
Description
Special Cases
Ethertype
Enter the Ethertype filter name.
Disposition
From the list, select one of the following:
•
Default—Use the disposition you set for the Ethertype
filter.
•
Forward—Use this setting to forward protocol traffic.
•
Block—Use this setting to block protocol traffic.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-14
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Table 3-4
Ethertype Filter Special Cases Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Priority
From the list, select one of the following:
•
Default—This setting is the same as best effort, which
applies to normal LAN traffic.
•
Background—Use this setting for bulk transfers and other
activities that are allowed on the network but should not
impact network use by other users and applications.
•
Excellent Effort—Use this setting for a network’s most
important users.
•
Controlled Load—Use this setting for important business
applications that are subject to some form of admission
control.
•
Interactive Video—Use this setting for traffic with less
than 100 ms delay.
•
Interactive Voice—Use this setting for traffic with less
than 10 ms delay.
•
Network Control—Use this setting for traffic that must get
through to maintain and support the network infrastructure.
Time to Live (msec)
Step 3
unicast
Enter the number of milliseconds unicast packets should stay in
the access point’s buffer before they are discarded.
multicast
Enter the number of milliseconds multicast packets should stay
in the access point’s buffer before they are discarded.
Alert
From the list, select one of the following:
•
yes—Use this setting to send an alert to the event log when
a user transmits or receives the protocol through the access
point.
•
no—Use this setting to not send an alert to the event log.
Click Add. The new name is added to the list box.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-15
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Step 4
Select one of the following:
•
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the
Template, page 3-89.)
•
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)
•
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template
Categories, page 3-2.)
Deleting Special Cases
Procedure
Step 1
To delete special cases for the access point's Ethernet port, select the Ethertype
name from the list box, then click Delete.
Step 2
Select one of the following:
•
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the
Template, page 3-89.)
•
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)
•
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template
Categories, page 3-2.)
Defining IP Protocol Filters
Procedure
Step 1
Select Association > IP Protocol Filters. The Association: IP Protocol Filters
dialog box appears.
Step 2
With this option you can:
•
Create new filters—See Creating New IP Protocol Filters, page 3-17.
•
Delete the filters—See Deleting IP Protocol Filters, page 3-18.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-16
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Using this option you can also:
•
Create Special Cases —See Creating Special Cases, page 3-18.
•
Delete Special Cases—See Deleting Special Cases, page 3-21.
Creating New IP Protocol Filters
Procedure
Step 1
To create and enable IP protocol filters, enter the following:
Field
Description
Add New Protocol Filter
Set ID
Enter an identification number for the filter set.
Set Name
Enter a descriptive filter set name.
See Naming Guidelines, page A-1.
Default Disposition
From the list, select one of the following:
•
Forward—Use this setting to forward protocol
traffic.
•
Block—Use this setting to block protocol traffic.
Default Time to Live (msec)
unicast
Enter the number of milliseconds unicast packets
should stay in the access point’s buffer before they are
discarded.
multicast
Enter the number of milliseconds multicast packets
should stay in the access point’s buffer before they are
discarded.
Step 2
Click Add. The new name is added to the Current Protocol Filters list.
Step 3
Select one of the following in the left pane:
•
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the
Template, page 3-89.)
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-17
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
•
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)
•
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template
Categories, page 3-2.)
Deleting IP Protocol Filters
Procedure
Step 1
To delete an IP protocol filter, select the name from the Current Protocol Filters
list, then click Delete.
Step 2
Select one of the following in the left pane:
•
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the
Template, page 3-89.)
•
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)
•
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template
Categories, page 3-2.)
Creating Special Cases
Procedure
Step 1
Select the default filter for which you want to define a special case.
Step 2
Enter the following:
Table 3-5
IP Protocol Filters Special Cases Settings
Field
Description
Special Cases
Protocol
Enter the IP protocol name.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-18
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Table 3-5
IP Protocol Filters Special Cases Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Disposition
From the list, select one of the following:
Priority
•
Default—Use the disposition you set for the protocol
filter.
•
Forward—Use this setting to forward traffic.
•
Block—Use this setting to block traffic.
From the list, select one of the following:
•
Default—This setting is the same as best effort, which
applies to normal LAN traffic.
•
Background—Use this setting for bulk transfers and
other activities that are allowed on the network but
should not impact network use by other users and
applications.
•
Excellent Effort—Use this setting for a network's most
important users.
•
Controlled Load—Use this setting for important
business applications that are subject to some form of
admission control.
•
Interactive Video—Use this setting for traffic with less
than 100 ms delay.
•
Interactive Voice—Use this setting for traffic with less
than 10 ms delay.
•
Network Control—Use this setting for traffic that must
get through to maintain and support the network
infrastructure.
Time to Live (msec)
unicast
Enter the number of milliseconds unicast packets should
stay in the access point’s buffer before they are discarded.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-19
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Table 3-5
IP Protocol Filters Special Cases Settings (continued)
Field
Description
multicast
Enter the number of milliseconds multicast packets should
stay in the access point’s buffer before they are discarded.
Alert
From the list, select one of the following:
•
yes—Use this setting to send an alert to the event log
when a user transmits or receives the protocol through
the access point.
•
no—Use this setting to not send an alert to the event
log.
Step 3
Click Add. The new name is added to the list box.
Step 4
Select one of the following in the left pane:
•
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the
Template, page 3-89.)
•
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)
•
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template
Categories, page 3-2.)
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-20
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Deleting Special Cases
Procedure
Step 1
To delete special cases, select the protocol name from the list box, then click
Delete.
Step 2
Select one of the following in the left pane:
•
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the
Template, page 3-89.)
•
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)
•
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template
Categories, page 3-2.)
Defining IP Port Filters
Procedure
Step 1
Select Association > IP Port Filters. The Association: IP Port Filters dialog box
appears.
Step 2
With this option you can:
•
Create new filters—See Creating New Port Filters, page 3-22.
•
Delete the filters—See Deleting Port Filters, page 3-23.
Using this option you can also:
•
Create Special Cases —See Creating Special Cases, page 3-23.
•
Delete Special Cases—See Deleting Special Cases, page 3-25.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-21
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Creating New Port Filters
Procedure
Step 1
To create and enable port filters, enter the following:
Field
Description
Add New Protocol Filter
Set ID
Enter an identification number for the filter set.
Set Name
Enter a descriptive filter set name.
See Naming Guidelines, page A-1.
Default Disposition
From the list, select one of the following:
•
Forward—Use this setting to forward traffic.
•
Block—Use this setting to block traffic.
Default Time to Live (msec)
unicast
Enter the number of milliseconds unicast packets
should stay in the access point’s buffer before they
are discarded.
multicast
Enter the number of milliseconds multicast packets
should stay in the access point’s buffer before they
are discarded.
Step 2
Click Add. The new name is added to the Current Port Filters list.
Step 3
Select one of the following in the left pane:
•
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the
Template, page 3-89.)
•
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)
•
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template
Categories, page 3-2.)
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-22
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Deleting Port Filters
Procedure
Step 1
To delete a protocol filter, select the name from the Current Port Filters list, then
click Delete.
Step 2
Select one of the following in the left pane:
•
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the
Template, page 3-89.)
•
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)
•
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template
Categories, page 3-2.)
Creating Special Cases
Procedure
Step 1
Select the default filter for which you want to define a special case.
Step 2
Enter the following:
Table 3-6
IP Port Filters Special Cases Settings
Field
Description
Special Cases
Port
Enter the IP Port filter name.
Disposition
From the list, select one of the following:
•
Default—Use the disposition you set for the port filter.
•
Forward—Use this setting to forward protocol traffic.
•
Block—Use this setting to block protocol traffic.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-23
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Table 3-6
IP Port Filters Special Cases Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Priority
From the list, select one of the following:
•
Default—This setting is the same as best effort, which
applies to normal LAN traffic.
•
Background—Use this setting for bulk transfers and
other activities that are allowed on the network but
should not impact network use by other users and
applications.
•
Excellent Effort—Use this setting for a network's most
important users.
•
Controlled Load—Use this setting for important
business applications that are subject to some form of
admission control.
•
Interactive Video—Use this setting for traffic with less
than 100 ms delay.
•
Interactive Voice—Use this setting for traffic with less
than 10 ms delay.
•
Network Control—Use this setting for traffic that must
get through to maintain and support the network
infrastructure.
Time to Live (msec)
unicast
Enter the number of milliseconds unicast packets should stay
in the buffer before they are discarded.
multicast
Enter the number of milliseconds multicast packets should
stay in the buffer before they are discarded.
Alert
From the list, select one of the following:
•
yes—Use this setting to send an alert to the event log
when a user transmits or receives the protocol through
the access point.
•
no—Use this setting to not send an alert to the event log.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-24
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Step 3
Select one of the following in the left pane:
•
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the
Template, page 3-89.)
•
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)
•
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template
Categories, page 3-2.)
Deleting Special Cases
Procedure
Step 1
To delete special cases, select the port name from the list box, then click Delete.
Step 2
Select one of the following in the left pane:
•
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the
Template, page 3-89.)
•
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)
•
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template
Categories, page 3-2.)
Defining Advanced Associations
Use this option to control the total number of devices an access point can list in
the Association Table and the amount of time the access point continues to track
each device class when a device is inactive.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-25
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Procedure
Step 1
Select Association > Advanced. The Association: Advanced dialog box appears.
Step 2
To define advanced associations, enter the following:
Note
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.
Table 3-7
Advanced Association Settings
Field
Description
Alert Severity Level
From the list select one of the following:
•
systemFatal—Indicates an event that prevents
operation of the port or device.
•
protocolFatal—Indicates an event that prevents
operation of the port or device
•
portFatal—Indicates an event that prevents
operation of the port or device
•
systemAlert—Indicates that you need to take
action to correct the condition.
•
protocolAlert—Indicates that you need to take
action to correct the condition.
•
portAlert—Indicates that you need to take
action to correct the condition.
•
externalAlert—Indicates that you need to take
action to correct the condition.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-26
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Table 3-7
Advanced Association Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Max Bytes Stored Per
Alert Packet
•
systemWarning—Indicates that an error or
failure may have occurred.
•
protocolWarning—Indicates that an error or
failure may have occurred.
•
portWarning—Indicates that an error or failure
may have occurred.
•
externalWarning—Indicates that an error or
failure may have occurred.
•
systemInfo—Notification that some sort of
event has occurred.
•
protocolInfo—Notification that some sort of
event has ocurred.
•
portInfo—Notification that some sort of event
has ocurred.
•
externalInfo—Notification that some sort of
event has ocurred.
Enter the maximum number of bytes the access point
stores for each Station Alert packet when packet
tracing is enabled.
If you use 0, the access point does not store bytes for
Station Alert packets; it only logs the event.
Max Fwd Table Entries From the list, select one of the following to
designate the maximum number of devices that can
appear in the Association Table:
1024, 2048, 4096, 8192, 16384, 32768, 65536.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-27
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Table 3-7
Advanced Association Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Enable Extended Stats
in MIB
From the list, select one of the following:
•
Enable—Use this setting to enable the storage
of detailed statistics in the device’s memory.
•
Disable—Use this setting to disable the storage
of detailed statistics in the device’s memory.
When you disable extended statistics you
conserve memory, and the device can include
more devices in the Association Table.
Enable PSPF
From the list, select one of the following:
•
Enable—Use this setting to enable Publicly
Secure Packet Forwarding, which ensures that
client devices cannot communicate with other
client devices on the wireless network. This
feature is useful for public wireless networks
like those installed in airports or on college
campuses.
•
Disable—Use this setting to disable Publicly
Secure Packet Forwarding.
Click see detail to see for which versions this setting
is valid.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-28
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Table 3-7
Advanced Association Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Unknown Class
Timeout
Enter the number of seconds the access point
continues to track an inactive device depending on
its class.
Multicast Addresses
Timeout
Infrastructure Hosts
Timeout
Client Stations
Timeout
A setting of zero tells the access point to track a
device indefinitely no matter how long it is inactive.
A setting of 300 equals 5 minutes; 1800 equals 30
minutes; 28800 equals 8 hours.
Repeaters Timeout
Access Points Timeout
Across Bridge Hosts
Timeout
Non-Root Bridges
Timeout
Root Bridges Timeout
Step 3
Select one of the following in the left pane:
•
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the
Template, page 3-89.)
•
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)
•
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template
Categories, page 3-2.)
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-29
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Configuring Port Assignments
When you assign specific ports, your network topology remains constant even
when devices reboot.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Association > Port Assignments. The Association: Port Assignments
dialog box appears.
Step 2
To define port assignments, enter the following:
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.
Note
Step 3
Field
Description
ifIndex
Lists the port’s designator in the Standard MIB-II
(RFC1213-MIB.my) interface index.
dot1dBasePort
Lists the port’s designator in the Bridge MIB (RFC1493;
BRIDGE-MIB.my) interface index.
AID
Lists the port’s 802.11 radio drivers association
identifier.
Station
Enter the MAC address of the device to which you want
to assign the port.
Select one of the following in the left pane:
•
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the
Template, page 3-89.)
•
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)
•
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template
Categories, page 3-2.)
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-30
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Configuring the Ethernet Port
Use this option to configure the device’s Ethernet port.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Ethernet. The menu expands and the Ethernet dialog box displays in the
right pane.
Step 2
Select one of the following from the Ethernet menu:
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.
Note
•
Identification—See Identifying the Ethernet Port, page 3-31.
•
Filters—See Setting Up Ethernet Filters, page 3-32.
•
Advanced—See Defining the Ethernet Advanced Settings, page 3-34.
Identifying the Ethernet Port
Use this option to define basic identity information for the Ethernet port.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Ethernet > Identification. The Ethernet: Identification dialog box
displays in the right pane.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-31
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Step 2
Enter the following information to identify the port:
Field
Description
Primary Port?
From the list, select one of the following:
Adopt Primary Port Identity?
Step 3
•
yes—Sets the Ethernet port as the
primary port.
•
no—Sets the radio port as the primary
port.
From the list, select one of the following:
•
yes—This adopts the primary port
settings (MAC and IP addresses) for the
Ethernet port.
•
no—This uses different MAC and IP
addresses for the Ethernet port.
Select one of the following in the left pane:
•
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the
Template, page 3-89.)
•
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)
•
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template
Categories, page 3-2.)
Setting Up Ethernet Filters
Use this option to define filters for the Ethernet port, the IP Protocol, and the IP
Port.
Note
Changing this setting may cause the access point to reboot.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-32
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Procedure
Step 1
Select Ethernet > Filters. The Ethernet: Filters dialog box displays in the right
pane.
Step 2
Complete the following:
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.
Note
Field
Description
Ethertype
Receive
Enter the ID of a defined Ethertype filter, or select one of the
filters you created using Association > Ethertype Filters.
Transmit
Enter the ID of a defined Ethertype filter, or select one of the
filters you created using Association > Ethertype Filters.
IP Protocol
Receive
Enter the ID of a defined IP protocol filter, or select one of
the filters you created using Association > IP Protocol
Filters.
Transmit
Enter the ID of a defined IP protocol filter, or select one of
the filters you created using Association > IP Protocol
Filters.
IP Port
Step 3
Receive
Enter the ID of a defined IP port filter, or select one of the
filters you created using Association > IP Port Filters.
Transmit
Enter the ID of a defined IP port filter, or select one of the
filters you created using Association > IP Port Filters.
Select one of the following in the left pane:
•
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the
Template, page 3-89.)
•
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-33
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
•
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template
Categories, page 3-2.)
Defining the Ethernet Advanced Settings
Use this option to define the settings and operational status of the Ethernet port.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Ethernet > Advanced. The Ethernet: Advanced dialog box displays in the
right pane.
Step 2
Complete the following:
Note
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.
Table 3-8
Ethernet Advanced Settings
Field
Description
Status
From the list, select one of the following:
Packet Forwarding
•
up— Enables the Ethernet port for normal operation.
•
down—Disables the device’s Ethernet port.
From the list, select one of the following:
•
enabled—Allows normal operation.
•
disabled—Prevents data from moving between the
Ethernet and the radio, which is useful in
troubleshooting.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-34
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Table 3-8
Ethernet Advanced Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Default Multicast
Address Filter
From the list, select one of the following:
Maximum Multicast
Packets/Second
•
allowed—The access point forwards all traffic
except packets sent to the MAC addresses set as
disallowed under Association > Address Filters.
•
disallowed—The access point discards all traffic
except packets sent to the MAC addresses set as
allowed under Association > Address Filters.
Use this setting to control the number of multicast
packets that can pass through the Ethernet port each
second.
If you enter 0, the access point passes an unlimited
number of multicast packets.
If you enter a number other than 0, the device passes only
that number of multicast packets per second.
Default Unicast
Address Filter
Step 3
From the list, select one of the following:
•
allowed—The access point forwards all traffic
except packets sent to MAC addresses that have
been set as disallowed under Association > Address
Filters.
•
disallowed—The access point discards all traffic
except packets sent to the MAC addresses that have
been set as allowed under Association > Address
Filters.
Select one of the following in the left pane:
•
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the
Template, page 3-89.)
•
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)
•
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template
Categories, page 3-2.)
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-35
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Configuring the Radio
Use this option to configure the device’s radio.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Radio. The menu expands and the Radio dialog box displays in the right
pane.
Step 2
Select one of the following from the Radio menu:
Note
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.
•
Identification—See Identifying the Radio Port, page 3-36.
•
Filters—See Setting Up Radio Filters, page 3-38.
•
Hardware—See Defining the Radio Hardware Settings, page 3-39.
•
Advanced—See Defining the Radio Advanced Settings, page 3-44.
•
Searched Channels—See Defining the Radio Searched Channels Settings,
page 3-49.
Identifying the Radio Port
Use this option to define basic identity information for the Ethernet port.
Note
Changing this setting may cause the access point to reboot.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-36
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Procedure
Step 1
Select Radio > Identification. The Radio: Identification dialog box displays in
the right pane.
Step 2
Enter the following information to identify the port:
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.
Note
Field
Description
Primary Port?
From the list, select one of the following:
Adopt Primary Port Identity?
Step 3
•
yes—Sets the radio port as the primary
port.
•
no—Sets the Ethernet port as the
primary port.
From the list, select one of the following:
•
yes—This adopts the primary port
settings (MAC and IP addresses) for the
Ethernet port.
•
no—This uses different MAC and IP
addresses for the Ethernet port.
Select one of the following in the left pane:
•
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the
Template, page 3-89.)
•
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)
•
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template
Categories, page 3-2.)
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-37
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Setting Up Radio Filters
Note
Changing this setting may cause the access point to reboot.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Radio > Filters. The Radio Filters dialog box displays in the right pane.
Step 2
Complete the following:
Note
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.
Table 3-9
Field
Radio Filters Settings
Description
Ethertype
Receive
Enter the ID of a defined Ethertype filter, or
select one of the filters you created using
Association > Ethertype Filters.
Transmit
Enter the ID of a defined Ethertype filter, or
select one of the filters you created using
Association > Ethertype Filters.
IP Protocol
Receive
Enter the ID of a defined IP protocol filter, or
select one of the filters you created using
Association > IP Protocol Filters.
Transmit
Enter the ID of a defined IP protocol filter, or
select one of the filters you created using
Association > IP Protocol Filters.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-38
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Table 3-9
Radio Filters Settings (continued)
Field
Description
IP Port
Step 3
Receive
Enter the ID of a defined IP port protocol
filter, or select one of the filters you created
using Association > IP Port Filters.
Transmit
Enter the ID of a defined IP port protocol
filter, or select one of the filters you created
using Association > IP Port Filters.
Select one of the following in the left pane:
•
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the
Template, page 3-89.)
•
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)
•
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template
Categories, page 3-2.)
Defining the Radio Hardware Settings
Procedure
Step 1
Select Radio > Hardware. The Radio: Hardware dialog box displays in the right
pane.
Step 2
Complete the following:
Note
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-39
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Table 3-10 Radio Hardware Settings
Field
Description
Service SetID (SSID)
Enter a unique identifier client devices use to
associate with the access point. It can be any
alphanumeric, case-sensitive string, from 2
to 32 characters long.
Several access points on a network or
sub-network can share an SSID.
Allow “Broadcast” SSID to
Associate
From the list, select one of the following:
•
yes—Allows devices that do not specify
an SSID (devices that are “broadcasting”
in search of an access point to associate
with) to associate with the access point.
•
no—Does not allow devices that do not
specify an SSID (devices that are
“broadcasting” in search of an access
point to associate with) to associate with
the access point.
With no selected, the SSID used by the
client device must match exactly the
access point’s SSID.
Enable “World Mode”
multi-domain operation?
From the list, select one of the following:
•
yes—Allows the access point to add
channel carrier set information to its
beacon.
Client devices with world-mode enabled
receive the carrier set information and
adjust their settings automatically.
•
no—Does not allow the access point to
add channel carrier set information to its
beacon.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-40
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Table 3-10 Radio Hardware Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Data Rates (Mb/sec)
1.0
From the list, select one of the following for
each of the four rates in megabits per second:
2.0
5.5
•
basic—Allows transmission at this rate
for all packets, both unicast and
multicast. At least one data rate must be
set to basic.
•
yes—Allows transmission at this rate for
unicast packets only.
•
no—Does not allow transmission at this
rate.
11.0
Transmit Power
From the list, select one of the following
milliwatt settings: 1, 5, 20, 30, 50, 100.
To reduce interference or to conserve power,
select a lower power setting.
Fragmentation Threshold
(256-2338)
Enter a setting to determine the size at which
packets are fragmented (sent as several
pieces instead of as one block).
Use a low setting in areas where
communication is poor or where there is a
great deal of radio interference.
RTS Threshold (0-2339)
Enter a setting to determine the packet size at
which the access point issues a request to
send (RTS) before sending the packet.
A low RTS Threshold setting can be useful in
areas where many client devices are
associating with the access point, or in areas
where the clients are far apart and can detect
only the access point and not each other.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-41
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Table 3-10 Radio Hardware Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Maximum RTS Retries (1-128)
Enter the maximum number of times the
access point issues an RTS before stopping
the attempt to send the packet through the
radio.
Max. Data Retires (1-128)
Enter the maximum number of attempts the
access point makes to send a packet before
giving up and dropping the packet.
Beacon Period (Kusec)
Enter the amount of time between beacons in
Kilo microseconds. (One Kmsec equals
1,024 microseconds.)
Data Beacon Rate (DTIM)
Enter the amount of time, always a multiple
of the beacon period, to determine how often
the beacon contains a delivery traffic
indication message (DTIM).
The DTIM tells power-save client devices
that a packet is waiting for them.
If the beacon period is set at 100, its default
setting, and the data beacon rate is set at 2, its
default setting, then the access point sends a
beacon containing a DTIM every 200
Kmsecs. (One Kmsec equals 1,024
microseconds.)
Default Radio Channel
From the list, select the radio channel you
want for a default. Each channel covers 22
MHz.
The factory setting for Cisco wireless LAN
systems is Radio Channel 6 transmitting at
2437 MHz.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-42
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Table 3-10 Radio Hardware Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Search for less-congested Radio From the list, select one of the following:
Channel?
• yes—Allows the access point to scan for
the radio channel that is least busy and
selects that channel for use.
•
Receive Antenna
Transmit Antenna
no—Will not allow the access point to
scan for a radio channel that is least
busy.
From the list, select one of the following:
•
Right—Use this setting if your access
point has removable antennas and you
install a high-gain antenna on the access
point's right connector. (When you look
at the access point's back panel, the right
antenna is on the right.)
Use this setting for both receive and
transmit.
•
Left—Use this setting if your access
point has removable antennas and you
install a high-gain antenna on the access
point's left connector. (When you look at
the access point's back panel, the left
antenna is on the left.)
Use this setting for both receive and
transmit.
•
Diversity—Use this setting if your
access point has two fixed
(non-removable) antennas; it tells the
access point to use the antenna that
receives the best signal.
Use this setting for both receive and
transmit.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-43
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Step 3
Select one of the following in the left pane:
•
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the
Template, page 3-89.)
•
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)
•
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template
Categories, page 3-2.)
Defining the Radio Advanced Settings
Use this option to define the settings and operational status of the Ethernet port.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Radio > Advanced. The Radio: Advanced dialog box displays in the right
pane.
Step 2
Complete the following:
Note
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-44
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Table 3-11 Radio Advanced Settings
Field
Description
Status
From the list, select one of the following:
Packet Forwarding
•
up— Enables the Radio port for normal
operation.
•
down—Disables the device’s Radio
port.
From the list, select one of the following:
•
enabled—Allows normal operation.
•
disabled—Prevents data from moving
between the Ethernet and the radio,
which is useful in troubleshooting.
Default Multicast Address Filter From the list, select one of the following:
Maximum Multicast
Packets/Second
•
Allowed—The access point forwards all
traffic except packets sent to the MAC
addresses set as disallowed under
Association > Address Filters.
•
Disallowed—The access point discards
all traffic except packets sent to the
MAC addresses set as allowed under
Association > Address Filters.
Use this setting to control the number of
multicast packets that can pass through the
Ethernet port each second.
If you enter 0, the access point passes an
unlimited number of multicast packets.
If you enter a number other than 0, the device
passes only that number of multicast packets
per second.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-45
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Table 3-11 Radio Advanced Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Maximum Number of
Associations
Enter the maximum number of wireless
networking devices that are allowed to
associate to the access point.
If you enter 0 it means that the maximum
possible number of associations is allowed.
Click see details to see for which versions
this setting is valid.
Use Aironet Extensions
Ethernet encapsulation
transform
Enhanced MIC verification for
WEP
From the list, select one of the following:
•
yes—Enable load balancing, Message
Integrity Check (MIC), and WEP key
hashing.
•
no—Does no enable the features listed
above.
From the list, select one of the following:
•
802.1H—Provides optimum
performance for Cisco Aironet wireless
products.
•
RFC1042—Ensures interoperability
with non-Cisco Aironet wireless
equipment.
From the list, select one of the following:
•
None—Does not enable MIC.
•
NMH—Enables MIC (Message Integrity
Check), a security feature that protects
your WEP keys by preventing attacks on
encrypted packets called bit-flip attacks.
Click see details to see for which versions
this setting is valid.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-46
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Table 3-11 Radio Advanced Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Temporal Key Integrity Protocol From the list, select the following:
•
None—Does not enable WEP key
hashing.
•
Cisco— Enables WEP key hashing that
defends against an attack on WEP in
which the intruder uses the unencrypted
initialization vector (IV) in encrypted
packets to calculate the WEP key.
Click see details to see for which versions
this setting is valid.
Broadcast WEP Key rotation
interval (sec)
Enter a rotation interval in seconds.
•
If you enter 900, for example, the access
point sends a new broadcast WEP key to
all associated client devices every 15
minutes.
•
If you enter 0, you disable broadcast
WEP key rotation.
Click see details to see for which versions
this setting is valid.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-47
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Table 3-11 Radio Advanced Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Default Unicast Address Filter
Open
Shared
From the list, select one of the following:
•
Allowed—The access point forwards all
traffic except packets sent to the MAC
addresses set as disallowed with the
Address Filters.
•
Disallowed—The access point discards
all traffic except packets sent to the
MAC addresses set as allowed with the
Address Filters or on your authentication
server.
Network-EAP
Select Disallowed for each
authentication type that also uses
MAC-based authentication.
Specified Access Point 1
Specified Access Point 2
Specified Access Point 3
Specified Access Point 4
If this access point is a repeater, enter the
MAC address of one or more root-unit access
points with which you want this access point
to associate.
With MAC addresses in these fields, the
repeater access point always tries to
associate with the specified access points
instead of with other less-efficient access
points.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-48
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Table 3-11 Radio Advanced Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Radio Modulation
From the list, select one of the following:
Radio Preamble
Step 3
•
Standard—This setting is the
modulation type specified in IEEE
802.11, the wireless standard published
by the Institute of Electrical and
Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Standards
Association.
•
MOK—This modulation was used
before the IEEE finished the high-speed
802.11 standard and may still be in use in
older wireless networks.
From the list, select one of the following:
•
Long—Ensures compatibility between
the access point and all early models of
Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Adapters
(PC4800 and PC4800A).
•
Short— Cisco Aironet’s Wireless LAN
Adapter supports short preambles; it
improves throughput performance.
Select one of the following in the left pane:
•
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the
Template, page 3-89.)
•
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)
•
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template
Categories, page 3-2.)
Defining the Radio Searched Channels Settings
Use this option to limit the channels that the access point scans when Search for
less-congested radio channel is enabled.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-49
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
The access point uses this setting to scan for the radio channel that is least busy
and selects that channel for use.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Radio > Searched Channels. The Radio: Searched Channels dialog box
displays in the right pane.
Step 2
Complete the following:
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.
Note
Step 3
Field
Description
Channel Number
List the available channels by number.
Frequency (mHz)
Lists the channel frequency.
Search?
From the list, select one of the following:
•
Yes—Use this option to include the
channel in the scan for less-congested
channels.
•
No—Use this option to exclude the
channel in the scan for less-congested
channels
Select one of the following in the left pane:
•
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the
Template, page 3-89.)
•
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)
•
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template
Categories, page 3-2.)
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-50
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Defining the Security Settings
Use this option to configure the device’s security settings.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Security. The menu expands and the Security dialog box displays in the
right pane.
Step 2
Select one of the following from the Security menu:
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.
Note
•
Local Admin Access—See Setting Local Admin Access, page 3-51.
•
Local AP/Client Security—See Setting Local AP/Client Security, page 3-52.
•
Server-Based Security—See Setting Server-Based Security, page 3-55.
Setting Local Admin Access
Use this option to enable or disable local admin access.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Security > Local Admin Access. The Security: Local Admin Access
dialog box appears.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-51
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Step 2
Complete the following:
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.
Note
Step 3
Field
Description
Local Admin Authentication
Select Enable to enable local admin
authentication, or Disable to disable it.
Allow read-only browsing
without login
Select Yes to allow it, or No to disallow it.
Select one of the following in the left pane:
•
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the
Template, page 3-89.)
•
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)
•
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template
Categories, page 3-2.)
Setting Local AP/Client Security
Use this option to set up the local access point and client security.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Security > Local AP/Client Security. The Security: Local AP/Client
Security dialog box appears:
Step 2
Complete the following:
Note
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-52
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Table 3-12 Local AP /Client Security Settings
Field
Description
Data Encryption by
Stations
From the list, select the encryption type:
•
No Encryption—Requires clients to communicate
with the Access Point without any data encryption.
This setting is not recommended.
•
Optional—Allows clients to communicate with the
Access Point either with or without data encryption.
Typically, this option is used when you have client
devices that cannot make a WEP connection, such as
non-Cisco clients in a 128-bit WEP environment.
•
Full Encryption—Requires clients to use data
encryption when communicating with the Access
Point. Clients not using data encryption are allowed
to communicate. This option is recommended if you
want to maximize the security of your Wireless
LAN.
Authentication Type
Open
Shared Key
From the list, select one of the following:
•
Yes—Allows any device, regardless of its WEP
keys, to authenticate and attempt to associate. This
is the recommended setting.
•
No—Does not allow any device, regardless of its
WEP keys, to authenticate and attempt to associate.
From the list, select one of the following:
•
Yes—Tells the access point to send a plain-text,
shared key query to any device attempting to
associate with the access point. This query can leave
the access point open to a known-text attack from
intruders. This is not as secure as the Open setting.
•
No—Does not allow the access point to send a
plain-text, shared key query to any device
attempting to associate with the access point.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-53
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Table 3-12 Local AP /Client Security Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Network-EAP
From the list, select one of the following:
•
Yes—Allows EAP-enabled client devices to
authenticate through the access point.
•
No—Does not allow EAP-enabled client devices to
authenticate through the access point.
Require EAP
Open
Shared
From the list, select one of the following:
•
Yes—Use this option if you use open and EAP
authentication to block client devices that are not
using EAP from authenticating through the access
point.
•
No—Use this option if you do not use open and EAP
authentication.
From the list, select one of the following:
•
Yes—Use this option if you use shared and EAP
authentication to block client devices that are not
using EAP from authenticating through the access
point.
•
No—Use this option if you do not use shared and
EAP authentication.
Encryption Keys 1 through 4
Transmit Key
Click to indicate this is the key you want to use to
transmit packets. Only one key can be selected at a time.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-54
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Table 3-12 Local AP /Client Security Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Encryption Key
Enter the type of encryption key used:
Key Size
Step 3
•
For 40-bit WEP keys, enter as 10 hexadecimal digits
(0-9, a-f, or A-F).
•
For128-bit WEP keys, enter as 26 hexadecimal
digits (0-9, a-f, or A-F).
From the list, select one of the following:
•
Not set
•
40 bit
•
128 bit
Select one of the following in the left pane:
•
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the
Template, page 3-89.)
•
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)
•
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template
Categories, page 3-2.)
Setting Server-Based Security
Use this option to set up server-based security.
Note
Changing this setting may cause the access point to reboot.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-55
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Procedure
Step 1
Select Security > Server-Based Security. The Security: Server-Based dialog box
appears:
Step 2
Complete the following:
Note
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.
Table 3-13 Server-Based Security Settings
Field
Description
Server Name/IP
Enter the name or IP address of the server.
Server Type
Enter the type of server.
Port
Enter the port number your server uses for
authentication.
Shared Secret
Enter the shared secret used by your server.
It must match the shared secret on the
RADIUS server.
Time Out (sec’s)
Enter the number of seconds the access point
should wait before authentication fails.
If the server does not respond within this
time, the access point tries to contact the next
defined authentication server.
Use this server for
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-56
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Table 3-13 Server-Based Security Settings (continued)
Field
Description
EAP Authentication
From the list, select one of the following:
•
Yes—Use this server for EAP
authentication.
In this type of authentication, the access
point relays authentication messages
between the server and the
authenticating client device.
•
No—Do not use this server for EAP
authentication.
Click see detail to see for which versions this
setting is valid.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-57
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Table 3-13 Server-Based Security Settings (continued)
Field
Description
MAC Address Authentication
From the list, select one of the following:
•
Yes—Use this server for MAC-based
authentication.
This allows only client devices with
specified MAC addresses to associate
and pass data through the access point.
Client devices with MAC addresses not
in a list of allowed MAC addresses are
not allowed to associate with the access
point.
•
No—Do not use this server for
MAC-based authentication.
Click see detail to see for which versions this
setting is valid.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-58
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Table 3-13 Server-Based Security Settings (continued)
Field
Description
802.1X Protocol Version (For
EAP Authentication)
From the list, select one of the following:
•
Draft 7—No radio firmware versions
compliant with Draft 7 have LEAP
capability, so you should not need to
select this setting.
•
Draft 8—Select this option if
LEAP-enabled client devices that
associate with this access point use radio
firmware versions 4.13, 4.16, or 4.23, or
if workgroup bridges associating with
this access point use firmware version
8.58 or earlier.
•
Draft 10—Select this option if client
devices that associate with this access
point or bridge use Microsoft Windows
XP EAP authentication, if
LEAP-enabled client devices that
associate with this bridge use radio
firmware version 4.25 or later, or if
workgroup bridges associating with this
access point use firmware version 8.65
or later.
This is the default setting in access point
and bridge firmware versions 11.06 and
later.
Step 3
Select one of the following in the left pane:
•
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the
Template, page 3-89.)
•
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)
•
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template
Categories, page 3-2.)
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-59
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Configuring Services
Use this option to configure various system features and support services on the
device.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Services. The menu expands and the Services dialog box displays in the
right pane.
Step 2
Select one of the following from the Services menu:
•
Start-Up—See Configuring Start-Up Settings, page 3-61.
•
Console/Telnet—See Configuring Console/Telnet Settings, page 3-63.
•
Hot Standby—See Configuring Hot Standby Settings, page 3-65.
•
Routing—See Configuring Routing Settings, page 3-67.
•
CDP—See Configuring CDP Settings, page 3-68.
•
DNS—See Configuring DNS Settings, page 3-69.
•
FTP—See Configuring FTP Settings, page 3-70.
•
HTTP—See Configuring HTTP Settings, page 3-72.
•
SNMP—See Configuring SNMP Settings, page 3-73.
•
SNTP—See Configuring SNTP Settings, page 3-74.
•
Accounting—See Configuring Accounting Settings, page 3-75.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-60
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Configuring Start-Up Settings
Use this option to configure the access point for your network's BOOTP or DHCP
servers for automatic assignment of IP addresses.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Services > Start-Up. The Services: Start-Up dialog box appears.
Step 2
Complete the following:
Note
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.
Table 3-14 Services Start-Up Settings
Field
Description
Configuration Server Protocol
From the list, select one of the following:
•
None—Use this setting if your network
does not have an automatic system for IP
address assignment.
•
BOOTP—Use this setting if IP
addresses are hard-coded based on MAC
addresses.
•
DHCP—Use this setting if IP addresses
are “leased” for predetermined periods
of time.
Use prior Config Server settings From the list, select one of the following:
if no server responds?
• yes— Use this setting to have the access
point save the boot server's most recent
response.
•
no—Use this setting to not use the most
recent response.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-61
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Table 3-14 Services Start-Up Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Read “.ini” file from file server? From the list, select one of the following:
•
always—Use this setting for the access
point to always load configuration
settings from an .ini file on the server.
•
never—Use this setting for the access
point to never load configuration
settings from an .ini file on the server.
•
if specified by server—Use this setting
for the access point to load configuration
settings from an .ini file on the server if
the server’s DHCP or BOOTP response
specifies that an .ini file is available.
BOOTP Server Timeout (sec’s)
Enter the length of time the access point
waits to receive a response from a single
BOOTP server.
DHCP Multiple-Offer Timeout
(sec’s)
Enter the length of time the access point
waits to receive a response when there are
multiple DHCP servers.
DHCP Requested Lease
Duration (min’s)
Enter the length of time the access point
requests for an IP address lease from your
DHCP server.
DHCP Minimum Lease Duration Enter the shortest amount of time the access
(min’s)
point accepts for an IP address lease. The
access point ignores leases shorter than this
period.
DHCP Class Identifier
Enter the access point’s group name.
The DHCP server uses the group name to
determine the response to send to the access
point.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-62
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Step 3
Select one of the following in the left pane:
•
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the
Template, page 3-89.)
•
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)
•
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template
Categories, page 3-2.)
Configuring Console/Telnet Settings
Use this option to configure the access point to work with a terminal emulator or
through Telnet.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Services > Console/Telnet. The Services: Console/Telnet dialog box
appears.
Step 2
Complete the following:
Note
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-63
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Table 3-15 Services > Console/Telnet Settings
Field
Description
Baud Rate
Enter a rate from 110 to 115,200, expressed
in bits per second.
The rate you enter is dependent on the
capability of the computer you use to open
the access point management system.
Parity
From the list, select one of the following:
•
None—Use this setting to use no parity
bit.
•
Even—Use this setting to make the total
number of bits even.
•
Odd—Use this setting to make the total
number of bits odd.
Data Bits
From the list, select one of the data bit
settings.
Stop Bits
From the list, select one of the stop bit
settings.
Flow Control
From the list, select one of the following:
Terminal Type
•
None—Use this setting to indicate no
flow control is used.
•
SW Xonn/Xoff—Use this setting to
indicate the method information is sent
between pieces of equipment to prevent
loss of data when too much information
arrives at the same time on one device.
From the list, select one of the following:
•
teletype—Use this setting if your
terminal emulator does not support
ANSI.
•
ANSI—Use this setting to offer graphic
features such as reverse video buttons
and underlined links.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-64
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Table 3-15 Services > Console/Telnet Settings (continued)
Step 3
Field
Description
Columns (64-132)
Enter a number to define the width of the
terminal emulator display within the range of
64 characters to 132 characters.
Lines (16-50)
Enter a number to define the height of the
terminal emulator display within the range of
16 characters to 50 characters.
Telnet
From the list, select one of the following:
•
Enable—Use this setting to enable
Telnet access to the management system.
•
Disable—Use this setting to prevent
Telnet access to the management system.
Select one of the following in the left pane:
•
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the
Template, page 3-89.)
•
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)
•
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template
Categories, page 3-2.)
Configuring Hot Standby Settings
Use this option to configure a standby access point as a client device associated
to a monitored access point.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Services > Hot Standby. The Services: Hot Standby dialog box appears.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-65
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Step 2
Complete the following:
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.
Note
Step 3
Field
Description
Hot Standby Mode
From the list, select one of the following:
•
Enable—Use this setting to allow hot standby
mode.
•
Disable—Use this setting to disable hot
standby mode.
Service Set ID (SSID)
Enter the monitored access point’s SSID.
MAC Address for the
Monitored AP
Enter the monitored access point’s MAC address.
Polling Frequency (1-30)
Enter the number of seconds between each query
the standby access point sends to the monitored
access point.
Timeout for Each Polling
(1-600)
Enter the number of seconds the standby access
point should wait for a response from the
monitored access point before it assumes that the
monitored access point has malfunctioned.
Select one of the following in the left pane:
•
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the
Template, page 3-89.)
•
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)
•
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template
Categories, page 3-2.)
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-66
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Configuring Routing Settings
Use this option to configure the access point to communicate with the IP network
routing system.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Services > Routing. The Services: Routing dialog box appears.
Step 2
Complete the following:
Note
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.
Field
Description
Default Gateway
Enter the IP address of your network's
default gateway in this entry field.
The entry 255.255.255.255 indicates no
gateway.
New Network Route
Destination Network
Enter the IP address of the destination
network.
Gateway
Enter the IP address of the gateway used to
reach the destination network.
Subnet Mask
Enter the subnet mask associated with the
destination network.
Step 3
Click Add to add an additional network route for the access point.
Step 4
To remove a network route, select it from the list, then click Remove.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-67
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Step 5
Select one of the following in the left pane:
•
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the
Template, page 3-89.)
•
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)
•
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template
Categories, page 3-2.)
Configuring CDP Settings
Use this option to enable, disable, or adjust the access point's CDP settings.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Services > CDP. The Services: CDP dialog box appears.
Step 2
Complete the following:
Note
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.
Field
Description
Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) From the list, select one of the following:
•
Enable—Use this setting to enable CDP.
•
Disable—Use this setting to disable
CDP.
Packet Hold Time
Enter the number of seconds other
CDP-enabled devices should consider the
access point’s CDP information valid.
Packet Sent Every
Enter the number of seconds between each
CDP packet the access point sends.
This value should always be less than the
packet hold time.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-68
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Step 3
Select one of the following in the left pane:
•
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the
Template, page 3-89.)
•
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)
•
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template
Categories, page 3-2.)
Configuring DNS Settings
Use this option to configure the access point to work with your network's Domain
Name System (DNS) server.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Services > DNS. The Services: DNS dialog box appears.
Step 2
Complete the following:
Note
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.
Table 3-16 Services > DNS Settings
Field
Description
Domain Name System (DNS)
From the list, select one of the following:
Default Domain
•
Enable—Use this option if your network
DNS.
•
Disable—Use this option if you network
does not use DNS.
Enter the name of your network’s IP domain.
Your entry might look like this:
mycompany.com
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-69
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Table 3-16 Services > DNS Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Domain Name Servers
Enter the IP addresses of up to three domain
name servers on your network.
Domain Suffix
Enter the portion of the full domain name
that you would like omitted from access
point displays.
For example, the full name of a computer
might be “mycomputer.mycompany.com.”If
you set the domain suffix to
“mycompany.com,” the computer’s name
would be displayed as “mycomputer.”
Step 3
Select one of the following in the left pane:
•
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the
Template, page 3-89.)
•
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)
•
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template
Categories, page 3-2.)
Configuring FTP Settings
Use this option to configure File Transfer Protocol settings for the access point.
All non-browser file transfers are governed by these settings.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Services > FTP. The Services: FTP dialog box appears.
Step 2
Complete the following:
Note
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-70
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Table 3-17 Services > FTP Settings
Field
Description
File Transfer Protocol (FTP)
From the list select one of the following:
•
TFTP
•
FTP
Default File Server
Enter the IP address or DNS name of the file
server where the access point should look for
FTP files.
FTP Directory
Enter the file server directory that contains
the firmware image files.
FTP User Name
Enter the username assigned to your FTP
server.
You do not need to enter a name in this field
if you selected TFTP.
FTP User Password
Enter the password associated with the file
server’s username.
You do not need to enter a password in this
field if you selected TFTP.
Step 3
Select one of the following in the left pane:
•
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the
Template, page 3-89.)
•
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)
•
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template
Categories, page 3-2.)
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-71
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Configuring HTTP Settings
Use this option to configure HTTP settings for the access point.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Services > HTTP The Services: HTTP dialog box appears.
Step 2
Complete the following:
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.
Note
Field
Description
Allow Non-Console Browsing
From the list, select one of the following:
HTTP Port
Step 3
•
Enable—Use this setting to allow
browsing to the management system.
•
Disable—Use this setting to make the
management system accessible only
through the console and Telnet
interfaces.
Enter the port through which the access point
provides web access.
Select one of the following in the left pane:
•
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the
Template, page 3-89.)
•
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)
•
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template
Categories, page 3-2.)
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-72
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Configuring SNMP Settings
Use this option to configure settings for notifications to be sent to an SNMP
server.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Services > SNMP. The Services: SNMP dialog box appears.
Step 2
Complete the following:
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.
Note
Step 3
Field
Description
Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP)
From the list, select one of the following:
•
Enable—Use this setting to allow event
notifications to be sent to an SNMP
server.
•
Disable—Use this setting to not allow
event notifications to be sent to an
SNMP server.
SNMP Trap Destination
Enter the IP address or the host name of the
server running the SNMP Management
software.
SNMP Trap Community
Enter the SNMP community name.
Select one of the following in the left pane:
•
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the
Template, page 3-89.)
•
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)
•
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template
Categories, page 3-2.)
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-73
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Configuring SNTP Settings
Use this option to configure time server settings.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Services > SNTP. The Services: SNTP dialog box appears.
Step 2
Complete the following:
Note
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.
Field
Description
Simple Network Time Protocol
(SNTP)
From the list, select one of the following:
•
Enable—Use this setting if your network
uses Simple Network Time Protocol.
•
Disable—Use this setting if your
network does not use Simple Network
Time Protocol.
Default Time Server
Enter enter the server’s IP address.
GMT Offset (hr)
From the list, select the time zone in which
the access point operates.
Use Daylight Savings Time
From the list, select one of the following:
•
Enable—Use this setting to have the
access point automatically adjust to
Daylight Savings Time.
•
Disable—Use this setting to not have the
access point automatically adjust to
Daylight Savings Time.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-74
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Step 3
Select one of the following in the left pane:
•
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the
Template, page 3-89.)
•
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)
•
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template
Categories, page 3-2.)
Configuring Accounting Settings
Use this option to configure settings that enable you to send network accounting
information about wireless client devices to a RADIUS server on your network.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Services > Accounting. The Services: Accounting dialog box appears.
Step 2
Complete the following:
Note
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-75
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Table 3-18
Accounting Settings
Field
Description
Enable accounting
From the list, select one of the following:
Enable delaying to report STOP
•
enable—Use this setting to turn on
accounting for your wireless network.
•
disable—Use this setting to turn off
accounting for your wireless network
•
enable—Use this setting to delay
sending a stop report to the server when
a client device disassociates from the
access point.
The delay reduces accounting activity
for client devices that disassociate from
the access point and then quickly
reassociate.
•
disable—Use this setting to not delay
sending a stop report to the server when
a client device disassociates from the
access point.
Minimum delay time to report
STOP (sec)
Enter the number of seconds the access point
waits before sending a stop report to the
server when a client device disassociates
from the access point.
Server Name/IP
Enter the name or IP address of the server to
which the access point sends accounting
data.
Server Type
Select RADIUS from the list.
(Additional types may be added in future
software releases.)
Port
Enter the communication port setting used by
the access point and the server.
The default setting, 1813, is the correct
setting for Cisco Aironet access points and
Cisco secure ACS.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-76
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Table 3-18
Accounting Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Shared Secret
Enter the shared secret used by your server.
It must match the shared secret on the
RADIUS server.
Time Out (sec’s)
Enter the number of seconds the access point
should wait before authentication fails.
If the server does not respond within this
time, the access point tries to contact the next
defined authentication server.
Enable Update
From the list, select one of the following:
•
enable—Use this setting to allow
accounting update messages for wireless
clients.
With updates enabled, the access point
sends an accounting start message when
a wireless client associates to the access
point, sends updates at regular intervals
while the wireless client is associated to
the access point, and sends an
accounting stop message when the client
disassociates from the access point.
•
disable—Use this setting to not allow
accounting update messages.
With updates disabled, the access point
sends only accounting start and
accounting stop messages to the server.
Update Delay (sec’s)
Enter the update interval in seconds.
If you use 360, the access point sends an
accounting update message for each
associated client device every 6 minutes.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-77
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Table 3-18
Accounting Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Use this server for
EAP Authentication
From the list, select one of the following:
•
Yes—Use this server for EAP
authentication.
In this type of authentication, the access
point relays authentication messages
between the server and the
authenticating client device.
•
non-EAP Authentication
Step 3
No—Do not use this server for EAP
authentication.
From the list, select one of the following:
•
Yes—Use this server for non-EAP
authentication.
•
No—Do not use this server for non-EAP
authentication.
Select one of the following in the left pane:
•
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the
Template, page 3-89.)
•
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)
•
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template
Categories, page 3-2.)
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-78
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Configuring Events
This option enables to you to customize the display of access point events (alerts,
warnings, and normal activity).
Procedure
Step 1
Select Events. The menu expands and the Events dialog box displays in the right
pane.
Step 2
Select one of the following from the Events menu:
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.
Note
•
Event Handling—See Configuring Event Handling, page 3-79.
•
Event Notifications—See Configuring Event Notification, page 3-84.
Configuring Event Handling
The event settings control how events are handled by the access point: counted,
displayed in the log, recorded, or announced in a notification. The settings are
color coded: red for fatal errors, magenta for alerts, blue for warnings, and green
for information.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Events > Event Handling. The Events: Event Handling dialog box
appears.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-79
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Step 2
Complete the following:
Note
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.
Table 3-19 Event Handling Settings
Field
Description
System Fatal
From the list, select one of the following:
Protocol Fatal
•
Count—Use this option to tally the total
events occurring in this category without
any form of notification or display.
•
Display Console—Use this option to
provide a read-only display of the event
but not record it.
•
Record—Use this option to make a
record of the event in the log and provide
a read-only display of the event.
•
Notify—Use this option to makes a
record of the event in the log, display the
event, and tell the access point to notify
someone of the occurrence.
Network Port Fatal
System Alert
Protocol Alert
Network Port Alert
External Alert
System Warning
Protocol Warning
Network Port Warning
External Warning
System Information
Protocol Information
Network Port Information
External Information
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-80
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Table 3-19 Event Handling Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Handle Alerts as Severity Level
From the list, select one of the following:
•
systemFatal—Indicates an event that
prevents operation of the device as a
whole.
•
protocolFatal—Indicates an event that
prevents operation of a specific
communications protocol in use, such as
HTTP or IP.
•
portFatal—Indicates an event that
prevents operation of the Ethernet or
radio network interface.
•
systemAlert—Indicates that you need to
take action to correct a condition on the
device as a whole.
•
protocolAlert—Indicates that you need
to take action to correct a condition on a
specific communications protocol in use,
such as HTTP or IP.
•
portAlert—Indicates that you need to
take action to correct the condition on
the Ethernet or radio network interface.
•
externalAlert—Indicates that you need
to take action to correct the condition on
a device on the network.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-81
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Table 3-19 Event Handling Settings (continued)
Field
Description
•
systemWarning—Indicates that an error
or failure may have occurred on the
device as a whole.
•
protocolWarning—Indicates that an
error or failure may have occurred on a
specific communications protocol in use,
such as HTTP or IP.
•
portWarning—Indicates that an error or
failure may have occurred on an Ethernet
or radio network interface.
•
externalWarning—Indicates that an
error or failure may have occurred on a
device.
•
systemInfo—Notification that some sort
of event has occurred on a device.
•
protocolInfo—Notification that some
sort of event has ocurred on a
communications protocol in use, such as
HTTP or IP.
•
portInfo—Notification that some sort of
event has ocurred on an Ethernet or radio
network interface.
•
externalInfo—Notification that some
sort of event has ocurred on a device.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-82
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Table 3-19 Event Handling Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Maximum Number of Bytes
Stored per Alert Packet
Enter the maximum number of bytes the
access point stores for each Station Alert
packet when packet tracing is enabled.
(0- 2312)
If you use 0, the access point does not store
bytes for Station Alert packets; it only logs
the event.
Note
Changing this setting may cause
the access point to reboot.
Maximum Memory Reserved for Enter the number of bytes reserved for the
Detailed Event Trace Buffer
Detailed Event Trace Buffer.
(bytes) (0-8388608)
The Detailed Event Trace Buffer is a tool for
tracing the contents of packets between
specified stations on your network.
Note
Step 3
Changing this setting may cause
the access point to reboot.
Select one of the following in the left pane:
•
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the
Template, page 3-89.)
•
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)
•
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template
Categories, page 3-2.)
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-83
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Configuring Event Notification
Use this option to enable and configure notification of fatal, alert, warning, and
information events to destinations external to the access point, such as an SNMP
server or a Syslog system.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Events > Event Notification. The Events: Event Notification dialog box
appears.
Step 2
Complete the following:
Note
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.
Table 3-20 Events > Event Notification Settings
Field
Description
Should Notify-Disposition
Events generate SNMP Traps?
From the list, select one of the of the
following:
•
Yes—Use this option to send event
notifications to an SNMP server.
•
No—Use this option if you do not want
to send notifications to an SNMP server.
SNMP Trap Destination
Enter the IP address or the host name of the
server running the SNMP Management
software.
SNMP Trap Community
Enter the SNMP community name.
Should Notify-Disposition
Events generate Syslog
Messages?
From the list, select one of the of the
following:
•
Yes—Use this option to send event
notifications to a Syslog server.
•
No—Use this option if you do not want
to send notifications to a Syslog server.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-84
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Table 3-20 Events > Event Notification Settings (continued)
Step 3
Field
Description
Syslog Destination Address
Enter the IP address or the host name of the
server running Syslog.
Syslog Facility Number
Enter the Syslog Facility number for the
notifications.
Select one of the following in the left pane:
•
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the
Template, page 3-89.)
•
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)
•
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template
Categories, page 3-2.)
Configuring Custom Values
This option enables to you to enter custom values that might not be available in
the Template Menu. It also allows you to quickly enter a value, if you know the
exact value you want to change, instead of going through the menu. (See
Examples, page 3-86.)
Note
This option should be used only by advanced users who have a good
understanding of the MIB variables they are setting.
Templates with custom key values are not validated.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Configure > Templates > Custom Values. The Custom Values dialog box
appears.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-85
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any
entries you have made in other Template windows up until that point.
Note
Step 2
Complete the following:
You must enter the exact syntax for the setting to work properly.
Note
Step 3
Field
Key
Description
Value
Enter a valid MIB value. (See Examples,
page 3-86.)
Enter a valid MIB key. (See Examples,
page 3-86.)
Click Add to add the custom value to the list.
Note
If the custom value you enter is the same as an existing one in the
Template Menu, the custom value will override the value in the menu.
Step 4
To remove a custom value, select it from the list, then click Remove.
Step 5
Select one of the following in the left pane:
•
Preview to see your changes before you apply them. (See Previewing the
Template, page 3-89.)
•
Finish to save the template. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)
•
Another template category to configure more options. (See Template
Categories, page 3-2.)
Examples
Following are examples of custom key values that can be entered:
•
Set system contact on access points.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-86
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
– Key: sysContact.0
– Value: ABC, XYZ Inc.
•
Set system location for access points.
– Key:sysLocation.0
– Value: Bldg ABC, XYZ Inc.
•
Set up a user for an access point
– Key:userMgrUserName.x
– Value: testUser
– Key:userMgrPassword.x
– Value: testPassword
– Key:userMgrCapabilities.x
– Value: 20
where:
– x is the next available index in the user manager table (userMgrConfig
Table)
– Capabilities are the sum of any of the following: 0=none;
1=Administrator; 2=Write; 4=Firmware Update; 8=Identity Update;
16=SNMP Community
•
Reboot an access point.
– Key:tsMsgSend0
– Value: 2
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-87
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
•
Classify workgroup bridges as network infrastructure
– Key:awcDot11DesiredSSIDInfrastructureWGB.2
– Value: false
where the possible values are T (true) and F (false)
•
Set the DHCP Client Identifier Type
– Key:bootconfigDhcpClientIdType
– Value: ethernet10Mb
where the possible values are text or numeric:
– ethernet10Mb or 1
– experimentalEthernet3Mb or 3
– amateurRadioAxDot25 or 3proteonProNetTokenRing or 4
– chaos or 5
– ieee802Networks or 6
– arcnet or 7
– hyperchannel or 8
– lanstar or 9
– autonet or 10
– localTalk or 11
– localNet or 12
– nonHardware or 128
•
Set the DHCP client Identifier Value
– Key: bootconfigDhcpClientIdValue
– Value: 22
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-88
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
•
Is MAC alone sufficient for to be fully authenticated
– Key: awcFtEnableMacOrEapAuth
– Value: F
where the possible values are T (true) and F (false)
•
Set Rogue AP alert timeout (minutes)
– Key: awcFtRogueApAlertTimeout
– Value: 29
•
Use symbol extensions
– Key: awcDot11SymbolExtensionsEnabled.2
– Value: 2
where the possible values are T (true) and F (false)
Previewing the Template
Procedure
Step 1
Click Preview. A window displays the configuration choices you have made to the
template.
Step 2
Click Finish. (See Finishing the Template, page 3-89.)
Finishing the Template
Procedure
Step 1
Click Finish in the left pane to complete creating a template. The Finish dialog
box appears in the right pane.
Note
It is recommended that you always validate the template before saving
it.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-89
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Step 2
Click Validate if you want to check the template configuration. A window
displays a message indicating for which devices and versions the configuration
template you just created is valid.
Note
Step 3
Templates containing custom key values are not validated.
Check Enable Version Check if you want the system to make sure you apply the
templates only to devices with valid versions.
If you do not enable the version check, templates will be applied to devices even
when the configuration is not valid for the device version.
Step 4
Click Save to create the template. The screen refreshes and the template name
appears in the Existing Templates listbox.
Creating a Template
Use this option to create a configuration template.
Note
Your login determines whether you can use this option.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Configure > Templates. The Templates dialog box appears.
Step 2
Enter a unique name. (See Naming Guidelines, page A-1 for details.)
Step 3
Click Create New. The window refreshes with Template Creation menu in the left
pane and the Template Name dialog box in the right pane.
Step 4
Select the choices in the left pane to create a configuration template. For a
description, see Template Choices, page 3-2.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-90
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Using the Templates
Copying a Template
Use this option to copy a configuration template that you can use as a base for
another template.
Note
Your login determines whether you can use this option.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Configure > Templates. The Templates dialog box appears.
Step 2
Select the template you want to copy from the Existing Templates box, then click
Create Copy. A dialog box appears asking you to enter a name for the copy.
Step 3
Enter a unique name. (See Naming Guidelines, page A-1 for details.)
Step 4
Click OK. The Templates window refreshes and the new name appears in the
Existing Templates list.
Step 5
Click Edit. (See Editing a Template, page 3-91.)
Editing a Template
Use this option to edit a configuration template.
Note
Your login determines whether you can use this option.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Configure > Templates. The Templates dialog box appears.
Step 2
Select the template you want to edit from the Existing Templates box, then click
Edit. The window refreshes with Template Creation menu in the left pane and the
Template Name dialog box in the right pane.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-91
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Managing Configuration Jobs
Step 3
Select the choices in the Template Menu to create a configuration template. For a
description, see Template Choices, page 3-2.
Deleting a Template
Use this option to delete a configuration template.
Note
Your login determines whether you can use this option.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Configure > Templates. The Templates dialog box appears.
Step 2
Select the template you want to delete from the Existing Templates box, then click
Delete. A window appears asking if you want to delete the template.
Step 3
Click OK to delete it.
Managing Configuration Jobs
This is window allows you view a list of all the jobs in their various states. It also
allows you to create, edit, and filter, and undo configuration jobs.
The topics covered in this section are:
•
Creating a Configuration Job, page 3-99
•
Viewing Configuration Job Status, page 3-99
– Filtering a Job, page 3-102
– Editing a Job, page 3-102
– Deleting a Job, page 3-103
– Stopping a Job, page 3-103
– Viewing Job Run Details, page 3-103
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-92
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Managing Configuration Jobs
Related Topic
Using the Templates, page 3-1.
Job Choices
When you create or edit a configuration job, the following choices appear in the
left pane of the Jobs window:
Note
Caution
These are steps that must be completed but do not have to be done in order.
1.
Job Name—See Naming the Job, page 3-93.
2.
Select Devices—See Naming the Job, page 3-93.
3.
Select Template—See Selecting a Template, page 3-95.
4.
Schedule Job—See Scheduling a Job, page 3-97.
Clicking on another tab before you have saved your entries in this window will
cause the window to reset and you will lose all the information you entered.
Naming the Job
Procedure
Step 1
Click Job Name. The Job Name dialog box appears.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-93
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Managing Configuration Jobs
Step 2
Complete the following:
Note
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any
entries you have made in other Job windows up until that point.
Table 3-21 Job Name
Field
Description
Job Name
Enter a name for the job.
See Naming Guidelines, page A-1.
Description
Enter a description of the job.
See Naming Guidelines, page A-1.
Protocol
Select the type of protocol used: HTTP or SNMP.
Note
Step 3
If you select SNMP, you will not be able to use
the Undo feature; it is only supported for
HTTP-based configuration jobs.
From the menu in the left pane, go to the next step, Select Devices. (For additional
information, see Selecting Devices, page 3-94.)
Selecting Devices
Procedure
Step 1
Click Select Devices. The Select window appears.
Note
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any
entries you have made in other Job windows up until that point.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-94
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Managing Configuration Jobs
Step 2
From the device selector, click the folder from which you want to build a device
list.
Clicking the folder displays the folder’s contents in the All Available Devices list
box.
Repeat this step as many times as necessary to select devices from the folder in
which they reside.
Step 3
From the All Available Devices list, select folders or individual devices, then click
Add. The devices appear in the Selected Devices list box.
Note
If you select a folder, the template will be applied to all of the devices
in that folder. If a device is subsequently added to the folder, the
template is applied to that device.
Step 4
To remove devices, select them from the Devices in Group list, then click
Remove.
Step 5
From the menu in the left pane, go to the next step, Select Template. (For
additional information, see Selecting a Template, page 3-95.)
Selecting a Template
Procedure
Step 1
Click Select Template. The Select Template window appears.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-95
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Managing Configuration Jobs
Step 2
Complete the following:
Note
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any
entries you have made in other Job windows up until that point.
Table 3-22 Select Template
Field
Description
Configuration Template
From the list, select the template which you
want to apply to the devices.
Details
Name
Displays the name of the selected template.
Device Types
Displays the device types that are valid for
the selected template.
Device Versions
Displays the device versions for the device
types listed in the Device Type field.
Each device type’s valid versions are
displayed in sequence and grouped using
parentheses.
Description
Displays the template description.
Version Check Enabled
Indicates whether the version check is
enabled.
(The check is enabled using the Finish step in
the Template Menu.)
Step 3
From the menu in the left pane, go to the next step, Schedule Job. (For additional
information, see Scheduling a Job, page 3-97.)
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-96
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Managing Configuration Jobs
Scheduling a Job
Procedure
Step 1
Click Schedule Job. The Schedule Job dialog box appears.
Step 2
Complete the following:
Note
Clicking Clear removes all the current entries in the window and any
entries you have made in other Job windows up until that point.
Table 3-23 Schedule Job
Field
Description
Run Now
Click to run the job. (The job begins running in 2 minutes.)
Note
This option ignores any dates you have entered
in Start Date and Start Time.
Start Date
From the lists, select the month, day, and year you want
your job to run.
Start Time
From the list, select the hour and minutes of the day you
want your job to run.
Repeat
Step 3
Tip
Enable
Check to run the job repeatedly.
Every
Indicate how often you want the job to repeat by entering a
numerical value, then selecting an interval of time: Hours,
Days, Months, or Years.
From the menu in the left pane, go to the next step, Finish. (For additional
information, see Finishing Scheduling, page 3-98.)
You can stop a running job by clicking Stop Job.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-97
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Managing Configuration Jobs
Finishing Scheduling
Procedure
Step 1
Click Finish in the left pane to complete creating a job. The Finish dialog box
appears in the right pane.
Step 2
Do one of the following:
Note
•
It is recommended that you always validate the job before saving it.
Click Validate if you want to check the job.
A window displays a confirmation message if the job is successful, and an
informational message if the selected template in the job is not valid for the
selected devices.
Note
•
Jobs with templates containing custom key values are not validated.
Click Save to create the job. The screen refreshes and
– The job name appears in the Scheduled Jobs list.
– A confirmation window appears with the job summary.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-98
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Managing Configuration Jobs
Creating a Configuration Job
Note
Your login determines whether you can use this option.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Configure > Jobs. The Jobs window appears.
Step 2
Enter a name for the job. See Naming Guidelines, page A-1.
Step 3
Click Create Job. The window refreshes with Job Creation menu in the left pane
and the Job Name dialog box in the right pane.
Step 4
Select the numbered choices in the left pane to create a job. For a description, see
Job Choices, page 3-93.
Viewing Configuration Job Status
This is window allows you to view job status. It also allows you to filter a job, edit
a job, view details about the job and undo a job.
Device data is polled is every 15 minutes by default, and the duration that job data
is retained is 30 days. To change either default, see Managing System Parameters,
page 5-58.
The topics covered in this section are:
Note
•
Viewing the Job State, page 3-100
•
Filtering a Job, page 3-102
•
Editing a Job, page 3-102
•
Deleting a Job, page 3-103
•
Stopping a Job, page 3-103
•
Viewing Job Run Details, page 3-103
Your login determines whether you can use this option.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-99
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Managing Configuration Jobs
Related Topic
Using the Templates, page 3-1
Viewing the Job State
Procedure
Step 1
From the Job State list, select the type of job whose status you want to check. The
window refreshes and the jobs are displayed.
The tables vary depending on which type of Job State you selected: Scheduled and
Unscheduled, Running, or All:
•
Field
Description
Job Name
The job name.
Recurring
Whether the job recurs.
Next Schedule
For scheduled jobs, this indicates the next
time the job will run. For completed jobs, this
is last time the job ran.
Last Run Status
The status of the last run.
•
Tip
Scheduled and Unscheduled
Running
You can stop a running job by clicking Stop Job.
Field
Description
Job Name
The job name.
Recurring
Whether the job recurs.
Job Start Time
The time the job started.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-100
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Managing Configuration Jobs
Field
Description
Percent Complete
The percent of the job that has completed
running.
Next Schedule
The next time the job is scheduled to run.
•
All
Field
Description
Job Name
The job name.
Recurring
Whether the job recurs.
Job State
The state of the job.
Note
Step 2
Step 3
A job in a DidNotStart state must
be rescheduled.
Next Schedule
For scheduled jobs, this indicates the next
time the job will run. For completed jobs, this
is last time the job ran.
Last Run Status
The status of the job the last time it run.
To sort table data, click on the column heading by which you want to sort the data:
•
A triangle indicates ascending order.
•
An upside-down triangle indicates descending order.
•
No triangle indicates that the data is not sorted.
You can do any of the following:
a.
Filter the job—See Filtering a Job, page 3-102.
b.
Edit the job—See Editing a Job, page 3-102.
c.
Delete the job—See Deleting a Job, page 3-103,
d.
Stop a job—See Stopping a Job, page 3-103.
e.
View the run details—See Viewing Job Run Details, page 3-103.
f.
Refresh the screen—Click Refresh.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-101
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Managing Configuration Jobs
Filtering a Job
Use this option to filter jobs from the displayed list. Filtering this way allows you
to display a limited set of jobs, making it easier to search for a particular job if
you know the name.
Procedure
Step 1
Click Filter Job. The Filter Job dialog box appears.
Step 2
Enter the name, or part of the a name, on which to filter. (Use % as a wildcard to
filter jobs. For example, entering %name% will filter all the jobs that contain
"name.")
Step 3
Click Apply filter. The Job window refreshes and the matching jobs are displayed
on the Jobs list.
Note
The filter is only applied until the page is refreshed.
Editing a Job
Use this option to edit jobs from the displayed list of jobs.
Procedure
Step 1
Select the job from the list which you would like to edit.
Step 2
Click Edit. The Job Name dialog box appears.
Step 3
Select the choices in the Template Menu to create a configuration template. For a
description, see Job Choices, page 3-93.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-102
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Managing Configuration Jobs
Deleting a Job
Use this option to delete jobs from the displayed list of jobs. Jobs that are
scheduled, unscheduled, completed and did not start can be deleted. Jobs that are
running cannot be deleted; they can be stopped.
Procedure
Step 1
Select the job from the list which you would like to edit.
Step 2
Click Delete.
Stopping a Job
Use this option to stop a job when it is in a running state.
Procedure
Step 1
Select the job from the list which you would like to stop.
Step 2
Click Stop Job. A window displays to confirm that you want to stop the job.
Step 3
Click OK, and the job stops.
Viewing Job Run Details
Use this option to view details about a job, or to undo a job from the displayed list
of jobs.
Procedure
Step 1
From the All Jobs table displayed in Configure > Jobs window, select a job for
which you would like to see details, then click Job Run Detail.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-103
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Managing Configuration Jobs
Step 2
Step 3
The details window appears with the Job Runs table:
Field
Description
Select Run
Used to select a job for which you want to see
more details.
Job Start Time
The time the job started.
Job End Time
The time the job ended.
Job Status
The status of the job.
Percent Complete
The percent of the job that completed.
Do any of the following:
•
To view details for a particular job run or to undo a job, select the job, then
click Show Run Details. The Job Run details table displays the information.
(See Viewing the Job Run Details Table, page 3-104.)
•
To view the job run log, click Job Run Log. A window displays all the details
for the selected job number.
•
To refresh the table, click Refresh.
Viewing the Job Run Details Table
The Job Runs Details table displays the following information:
Field
Description
Device Name
The name of the device.
Start Time
The time the job started.
End Time
The time the job ended.
Status
The status of the job.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-104
78-14092-01
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Managing Configuration Jobs
•
To sort table data, click on the column heading by which you want to sort the
data:
– A triangle indicates ascending order.
– An upside-down triangle indicates descending order.
– No triangle indicates that the data is not sorted.
•
To select all the jobs in the table, click Select All.
•
To deselect all the jobs in the table, click DeSelect All.
Note
•
If you have multiple screens, you must Select All or DeSelect All one
screen at a time.
To undo the selected configuration job, click Undo.
The Undo feature is supported only for HTTP-based configuration jobs (not
SNMP-based configurations jobs). It is not supported for:
– Custom Values
– Security options: Local Admin Authentication under the Local Admin
Access; Encryption Key Values under Local AP/Client Security; Shared
Secret under Server-Based Security; and Shared Secret under
Accounting.
– FTP username and password
– Previously undone jobs
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
3-105
Chapter 3
Configuring Devices
Managing Configuration Jobs
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
3-106
78-14092-01
4
C H A P T E R
Using Reports
The Reports tab displays information about your devices. You can save and email
reports. You can also set specific times for emailed reports to be run and sent
automatically.
The reports available are dependent on the groups of devices and individual
devices you choose from the selector in the left pane.
Following are the subtabs under Reports:
Note
Some of the subtabs may not be visible to some users.
•
Wireless Clients—See Displaying Wireless Client Reports, page 4-1
•
Current—See Displaying Current Reports, page 4-6
•
Trends—See Displaying Trends, page 4-21
•
Scheduled Email Jobs—See Scheduling Email Jobs, page 4-29
Displaying Wireless Client Reports
Wireless client reports provide information about the type of client that is
associating with an access point, information about how much bandwidth the
client is using, and a history of which access points the client has been associated
with.
Using this window, you can search for a wireless client based on their MAC
address or name.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
4-1
Chapter 4
Using Reports
Displaying Wireless Client Reports
The frequency with which the Wireless Clients reports are updated is 5 minutes
by default. To change the default setting, see Managing System Parameters,
page 5-58.
Note
Your login determines whether you can use this option.
Following are the report types you can view:
•
Client Detail Report—See Displaying a Client Detail Report, page 4-2
•
Client Statistics Report—See Displaying a Client Statistics Report, page 4-3
•
Client Historical Association Report—See Displaying a Client Historical
Association Report, page 4-5
Displaying a Client Detail Report
Procedure
Step 1
Select Reports > Wireless Clients. The Wireless Clients selector appears in the
left pane.
Step 2
From the list, select the method you want to use to search for clients: by MAC
address or name.
Step 3
Enter the MAC address or name. You can use an asterisk (*) as a wildcard to
denote numbers and letters.
Note
Step 4
The MAC address must be entered in hexadecimal, for example
0070eb37c90.
Click Search. A list appears in the left pane.
If you chose MAC address in the previous step, MAC addresses are listed; if you
chose name, names are listed.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
4-2
78-14092-01
Chapter 4
Using Reports
Displaying Wireless Client Reports
Step 5
Click the MAC address or name. The right pane refreshes and displays the Client
Detail Report, which is the default report, with the following information:
Column
Description
Name
The name assigned to the wireless client
device.
IP Address
The IP address of the wireless client device.
Classification
The type of wireless client device.
Associated with
The name or IP of the access point with
which it was last associated.
State
The operational state of the wireless client
device.
Time last seen
The time the client was last seen by the
system.
Software Version
The version of wireless client software.
MAC Address
The MAC address of the wireless client.
Step 6
To export the report, click Export. (See Exporting a Report, page 4-28.)
Step 7
To email the report, click Email Report. (See Emailing a Report, page 4-28.)
Displaying a Client Statistics Report
Procedure
Step 1
Select Reports > Wireless Clients. The Wireless Clients selector appears in the
left pane.
Step 2
From the list, select the method you want to use to search for clients: by MAC
address or name.
Step 3
Enter the MAC address or name. You can use an asterisk (*) as a wildcard to
denote numbers and letters.
Step 4
Click Search. A list appears in the left pane.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
4-3
Chapter 4
Using Reports
Displaying Wireless Client Reports
Step 5
Select the MAC address or name. The right pane refreshes.
Step 6
From the Report Name list, select Client Statistics Report.
Step 7
Click View. The Client Statistics Report displays in the right pane with the
following information:
Table 4-1
Client Statistics Report
Column
Description
Name
The name of the wireless client.
IP address
The IP address of the wireless client.
Time last seen
The time the wireless client was last seen by
the system.
Packets transmitted
The number of packets transmitted.
Octets transmitted
The number of octets transmitted.
Packets received
The number of packets received.
Octets received
The number of octets received.
Latest received signal strength
A tally of the received signal quality.
Latest signal quality
The current index of radio signal quality.
Sleep time in power save mode
The number of beacon intervals across which
the station will sleep in power-save mode, or
1 if the station will never be in power-save
mode.
Preferred transmission rate
The preferred data transmission rate.
Short retries
The number of times the RTS (request to
send) packet had to be retried.
Latest short retries
A tally of the number of retries.
Long retries
The number of times the data packet had to
be retried.
Latest long retries
A tally of the number of retries.
Received WEP errors
The number of received encryption errors.
Errors in transmitted packets
The number of errors in transmitted packets.
Errors in received packets
The number of errors in received packets.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
4-4
78-14092-01
Chapter 4
Using Reports
Displaying Wireless Client Reports
Table 4-1
Client Statistics Report (continued)
Column
Description
Errors in received octets
The number of errors in received octets.
Announcements sent
The total number of announcement packets
sent since the device was reset.
Step 8
To export the report, click Export. (See Exporting a Report, page 4-28.)
Step 9
To email the report, click Email Report. (See Emailing a Report, page 4-28.)
Displaying a Client Historical Association Report
Procedure
Step 1
Select Reports > Wireless Clients. The Wireless Clients selector appears in the
left pane.
Step 2
From the list, select the method you want to use to search for clients: by MAC
address or name.
Step 3
Enter the MAC address or name. You can use an asterisk (*) as a wildcard to
denote numbers and letters.
Step 4
Click Search. A list appears in the left pane.
Step 5
Select the MAC address or name. The right pane refreshes.
Step 6
From the Report Name list, select Client Historical Association Report.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
4-5
Chapter 4
Using Reports
Displaying Current Reports
Step 7
Click View. The Client Historical Association Report displays in the right pane
with the following information:
Column
Description
Associated with
The name or IP address of the AP.
Click on this link to view the AP Summary Report and
the Fault Summary.
For more information, see Displaying an AP Summary
Report, page 4-11.
Client IP Address
The IP address of the AP.
Software Version
The software version of the wireless client device.
Time
The time the client was last seen by the system.
For more information, see Date and Time Display on
the WLSE, page 1-2.
Step 8
To sort table data, click on the column heading you want to use to sort the data:
•
A triangle indicates ascending order.
•
An upside-down triangle indicates descending order.
•
No triangle indicates that the data is not sorted.
Step 9
To export the report, click Export. (See Exporting a Report, page 4-28.)
Step 10
To email the report, click Email Report. (See Emailing a Report, page 4-28.)
Displaying Current Reports
This window allows you to view current information about the monitored devices
in your network. You can view, export, and email the reports.
The frequency with which configuration data is collected from the devices is 15
minutes by default. To change the default setting, see Managing System
Parameters, page 5-58.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
4-6
78-14092-01
Chapter 4
Using Reports
Displaying Current Reports
Note
Your login determines whether you can use this option.
Following are the report types you can view:
•
Access Points and Bridges
– Group Report—See Displaying a Group Report, page 4-7
– Group Security Report—See Displaying a Group Security Report,
page 4-9
– Summary Report—See Displaying an AP Summary Report, page 4-11
– Detailed Report—See Displaying a Detailed Report, page 4-13
– Current Client Association—See Displaying a Current Client
Association Report, page 4-15
– EAP Authentication Report—See Displaying an EAP Authentication
Report, page 4-16
•
Switches
– Switch Summary Report—See Displaying a Switch Summary Report,
page 4-17
– AP and Bridge Connected to Switch Report—See Displaying an AP and
Bridge Connected to Switch Report, page 4-18
•
Routers
– Router Summary Report—Displaying a Router Summary Report,
page 4-19
– AP and Bridge Connected to Router Report—SeeDisplaying an AP and
Bridge Connected to Router Report, page 4-20
Displaying a Group Report
Procedure
Step 1
Select Reports > Current. The window refreshes with a device selector in the left
pane.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
4-7
Chapter 4
Using Reports
Displaying Current Reports
Step 2
From the device selector in the left pane, click to expand the folder for the group
reports you want to view. The right pane refreshes.
Step 3
From the Report Name list, select Group Report.
Step 4
Click View. The group report is displayed with the following headings:
Column
Description
AP Name
The name of the access point.
Click to view a detailed report. See
Displaying a Detailed Report, page 4-13.
AP IP Address
The IP address of the access point.
Click to open up a browser window to the
AP Summary Status.
Number of Clients connected
The number of clients currently connected
to the access point.
Number of Bridges connected
The number of bridges connected to the
access point.
Number of AP-Repeaters
Connected
The number of repeaters connected to the
access point.
Number of Users Connected
The number of current users.
Status (Fault)
Click to view the Fault Summary.
For more information, see Viewing Fault
Details, page 2-6.
Timestamp
The time the access point’s state last
changed.
For more information, see Date and Time
Display on the WLSE, page 1-2.
Step 5
To sort table data, click on the column heading you want to use to sort the data:
•
A triangle indicates ascending order.
•
An upside-down triangle indicates descending order.
•
No triangle indicates that the data is not sorted.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
4-8
78-14092-01
Chapter 4
Using Reports
Displaying Current Reports
Step 6
To export the report, click Export. (See Exporting a Report, page 4-28.)
Step 7
To email the report, click Email Report. (See Emailing a Report, page 4-28.)
Displaying a Group Security Report
Procedure
Step 1
Select Reports > Current. The window refreshes with a device selector in the left
pane.
Step 2
From the device selector in the left pane, click to expand the folder for the group
security reports you want to view.
Step 3
From the Report Name list, select Group Security Report.
Step 4
Click View. The group report is displayed with the following headings:
Table 4-2
Group Security Report
Column
Description
AP Name
The name of the device.
Click to view the AP Detailed Report, Fault
Summary, and the EAP Authentication
Report.
For more information, see Naming
Guidelines, page A-1.
AP IP Address
The IP address of the device.
Click to open up a browser window to the AP
Summary Status.
Encryption type
Indicates the type of encryption used: No
Encryption, Optional, or Full Encryption.
Length of WEP Key1 through 4
(in bits)
The WEP key length.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
4-9
Chapter 4
Using Reports
Displaying Current Reports
Table 4-2
Group Security Report (continued)
Column
Description
Authentication Type - Open
System
Indicates whether any device, regardless of
its WEP keys, can authenticate and attempt
to associate.
Authentication Type - Shared
Key
Indicates whether an access point sends a
query to any device attempting to associate
with the access point.
Status (Fault)
Click to view the Fault Summary.
For more information, see Viewing Fault
Details, page 2-6.
Link to EAP Authentication
Report
Click to view the EAP Authentication report.
Timestamp
The time the fault was reported.
For more information, see Displaying an
EAP Authentication Report, page 4-16.
For more information, see Date and Time
Display on the WLSE, page 1-2.
Step 5
To sort table data, click on the column heading you want to use to sort the data:
•
A triangle indicates ascending order.
•
An upside-down triangle indicates descending order.
•
No triangle indicates that the data is not sorted.
Step 6
To export the report, click Export. (See Exporting a Report, page 4-28.)
Step 7
To email the report, click Email Report. (See Emailing a Report, page 4-28.)
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
4-10
78-14092-01
Chapter 4
Using Reports
Displaying Current Reports
Displaying an AP Summary Report
Procedure
Step 1
Select Reports > Current. The window refreshes with a device selector in the left
pane.
Step 2
From the device selector in the left pane, click to expand the folder and select the
device for which you want a report. The right pane refreshes.
Step 3
From the Report Name list, select Summary Report.
Step 4
Click View. Two tables are displayed: the AP Summary Report and the Fault
Summary.
Table 4-3
AP Summary Report
Column
Description
Name
The system name for the device.
Timestamp
The time the fault was reported.
For more information, see Date and Time
Display on the WLSE, page 1-2.
MAC Address
The device’s MAC address.
IP Address
The device’s IP address.
Click to open up a browser window to the AP
Summary Status.
Software Version
The version of software running on the
device.
Number of Clients connected
The number of wireless clients connected to
the device.
Number of Bridges Connected
The number of wireless bridges connected to
the device.
Number of AP-Repeaters
Connected
The number of AP repeaters connected to the
device.
Number of Users Connected
The number of users currently connected to
the device.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
4-11
Chapter 4
Using Reports
Displaying Current Reports
Table 4-3
AP Summary Report (continued)
Column
Description
Model
Model number of the device.
Radio Service Set ID
The device’s radio SSID.
Root or Repeater
Indicates whether the device is used as a root
or repeater.
Link to the Detailed Report
Click to see details.
For more information, see Displaying a
Detailed Report, page 4-13.
Link to the Association Report
Click to see associations.
For more information, see Displaying a
Current Client Association Report,
page 4-15.
Link to the Access Point Web
Page
Click to open up a browser window to the AP
Summary Status.
For information on the Fault Summary, see Viewing Fault Details, page 2-6.
Step 5
To export the report, click Export. (See Exporting a Report, page 4-28.)
Step 6
To email the report, click Email Report. (See Emailing a Report, page 4-28.)
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
4-12
78-14092-01
Chapter 4
Using Reports
Displaying Current Reports
Displaying a Detailed Report
Procedure
Step 1
Select Reports > Current. The window refreshes with a device selector in the left
pane.
Step 2
From the device selector in the left pane, click to expand the folder and select the
device for which you want a report. The right pane refreshes.
Step 3
From the Report Name list, select Detailed Report.
Step 4
Click View. In addition to the Detailed Report, the Fault Summary, and the EAP
Authentication Report are also displayed.
Table 4-4
Detailed Report
Column
Description
System Name
The system name for the device.
Timestamp
The time the device’s state last changed.
For more information, see Date and Time
Display on the WLSE, page 1-2.
MAC Address
The device’s MAC address.
IP Address
The device’s IP address.
Click to open up a browser window to the AP
Summary Status.
Software Version
The device’s software version.
Number of Clients connected
The number of clients connected to the
device.
Number of Bridges Connected
The number of bridges connected to the
device.
Number of AP-Repeaters
Connected
The number of AP repeaters connected to the
device.
Number of Users Connected
The number of users connected to the device.
Model
The hardware model of the device.
Radio Service Set ID
The device’s SSID.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
4-13
Chapter 4
Using Reports
Displaying Current Reports
Table 4-4
Detailed Report (continued)
Column
Description
Root or Repeater
Indicates the role of the device.
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask.
Ensure Compatibility With
2Mbps Clients
Indicates whether it is compatible with
2Mbps clients.
Ensure Compatibility With
non-Aironet 802.11
Indicates whether it is compatible with
802.11.
SNMP Trap Destination
The IP address or host name of the server
running the SNMP Management software.
HTTP Port
The device’s HTTP setting.
Hot StandBy
Indicates whether the hot standby unit is in
monitoring mode.
If true, the current unit is in monitoring
mode.
Count of Access Point observed
by this AP
Number of access points seen by the access
points.
Current operating frequency
channel
The radio channel being used.
Ethernet Port Status
The operational status of the Ethernet port.
Radio Port Status
The operational status of the radio port.
Transmit Power (mW)
The access point’s transmission power
setting in milliwatts.
Switch IP (to which this AP is
attached)
The IP address of the switch to which this
access point is attached.
Switch Name (to which this AP
is attached)
The name of the switch to which this access
point is attached.
Encryption type
Indicates that devices using WEP are allowed
to communicate with the access point.
Length of WEP key 1 through 4
(in bits)
The WEP key length.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
4-14
78-14092-01
Chapter 4
Using Reports
Displaying Current Reports
Table 4-4
Detailed Report (continued)
Column
Description
Authentication Type - Open
System
Indicates whether any device, regardless of
its WEP keys, can authenticate and attempt
to associate.
Authentication Type - Shared
Key
Indicates whether an access point sends a
query to any device attempting to associate
with the access point.
Link to the Access Point Web
Page
Click to open up a browser window to the AP
Summary Status.
•
For Fault Summary information, see Viewing Fault Details, page 2-6.
•
For EAP Authentication Report, see Displaying an EAP Authentication
Report, page 4-16.
Step 5
To export the report, click Export. (See Exporting a Report, page 4-28.)
Step 6
To email the report, click Email Report. (See Emailing a Report, page 4-28.)
Displaying a Current Client Association Report
Procedure
Step 1
Select Reports > Current. The window refreshes with a device selector in the left
pane.
Step 2
From the device selector in the left pane, click to expand the folder and select the
access point for which you want a report. The right pane refreshes.
Step 3
From the Report Name list, select Current Client Association Report.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
4-15
Chapter 4
Using Reports
Displaying Current Reports
Step 4
Click View. The group report is displayed with the following headings:
Table 4-5
Current Client Association Report
Column
Description
Name
The name of the client associated with the access point.
IP Address
The IP address of the wireless client.
MAC Address
The wireless client’s MAC address.
Device Type
The wireless client device type.
Timestamp
The time the device was last seen by the system.
For more information, see Date and Time Display on the
WLSE, page 1-2.
State
Step 5
The operational state of the device.
To sort table data, click on the column heading you want to use to sort the data:
•
A triangle indicates ascending order.
•
An upside-down triangle indicates descending order.
•
No triangle indicates that the data is not sorted.
Step 6
To export the report, click Export. (See Exporting a Report, page 4-28.)
Step 7
To email the report, click Email Report. (See Emailing a Report, page 4-28.)
Displaying an EAP Authentication Report
Procedure
Step 1
Select Reports > Current. The window refreshes with a device selector in the left
pane.
Step 2
From the device selector in the left pane, click to expand the folder and select the
access point for which you want a report. The right pane refreshes.
Step 3
From the Report Name list, select EAP Authentication Report.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
4-16
78-14092-01
Chapter 4
Using Reports
Displaying Current Reports
Step 4
Click View. The group report is displayed with the following headings:
Table 4-6
Step 5
EAP Authentication Report
Column
Description
Server Name
The name of the authentication server.
Server Protocol
The protocol used by the server.
Server Priority
The priority of the server when multiple servers are
configured for the same service.
Server Port
The communication port setting used by the access point
and the server.
To sort table data, click on the column heading you want to use to sort the data:
•
A triangle indicates ascending order.
•
An upside-down triangle indicates descending order.
•
No triangle indicates that the data is not sorted.
Step 6
To export the report, click Export. (See Exporting a Report, page 4-28.)
Step 7
To email the report, click Email Report. (See Emailing a Report, page 4-28.)
Displaying a Switch Summary Report
Procedure
Step 1
Select Reports > Current. The window refreshes with a device selector in the left
pane.
Step 2
From the device selector in the left pane, click to expand the Switches folder and
select the switch for which you want a report. The right pane refreshes.
Step 3
From the Report Name list, select Switch Summary Report.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
4-17
Chapter 4
Using Reports
Displaying Current Reports
Step 4
Click View. The group report is displayed with the following headings:
Table 4-7
Switch Summary Report
Column
Description
System Name
The switch name.
IP Address
The switch IP address or hostname.
Status (Fault)
The fault status.
Click for details. For more information, see
Viewing Fault Details, page 2-6.
System Description
A description of the switch.
Location
The location of the switch.
Product Type
The switch hardware type.
System Version
The switch version.
Link to the AP and Bridge
Connected
Click for details.
For more information, see Displaying an AP
and Bridge Connected to Switch Report,
page 4-18.
Step 5
To export the report, click Export. (See Exporting a Report, page 4-28.)
Step 6
To email the report, click Email Report. (See Emailing a Report, page 4-28.)
Displaying an AP and Bridge Connected to Switch Report
Procedure
Step 1
Select Reports > Current. The window refreshes with a device selector in the left
pane.
Step 2
From the device selector in the left pane, click to expand the Switches folder and
select the switch for which you want a report. The right pane refreshes.
Step 3
From the Report Name list, select AP and Bridge Connected to Switch Report.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
4-18
78-14092-01
Chapter 4
Using Reports
Displaying Current Reports
Step 4
Click View. The report is displayed with the following headings:
Table 4-8
AP and Bridge Connected to Switch Report
Column
Description
Device Port
The device port.
AP Name
The name of the access point or bridge connected to the
switch.
AP IP Address
The IP address of the access point or bridge connected to
the switch.
Status (Fault)
The fault status.
Click for details. For more information, see Viewing Fault
Details, page 2-6.
Step 5
To export the report, click Export. (See Exporting a Report, page 4-28.)
Step 6
To email the report, click Email Report. (See Emailing a Report, page 4-28.)
Displaying a Router Summary Report
Procedure
Step 1
Select Reports > Current. The window refreshes with a device selector in the left
pane.
Step 2
From the device selector in the left pane, click to expand the Routers folder and
select the router for which you want a report. The right pane refreshes.
Step 3
From the Report Name list, select Router Summary Report.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
4-19
Chapter 4
Using Reports
Displaying Current Reports
Step 4
Click View. The group report is displayed with the following headings:
Table 4-9
Router Summary Report
Column
Description
System Name
The router name.
IP Address
The router IP address.
Status (Fault)
The fault status.
System Description
A description of the router.
Location
The location of the router.
Product Type
The router hardware type.
System Version
The router version.
Step 5
To export the report, click Export. (See Exporting a Report, page 4-28.)
Step 6
To email the report, click Email Report. (See Emailing a Report, page 4-28.)
Displaying an AP and Bridge Connected to Router Report
Procedure
Step 1
Select Reports > Current. The window refreshes with a device selector in the left
pane.
Step 2
From the device selector in the left pane, click to expand the Routers folder and
select the switch for which you want a report. The right pane refreshes.
Step 3
From the Report Name list, select AP and Bridge Connected to Router Report.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
4-20
78-14092-01
Chapter 4
Using Reports
Displaying Trends
Step 4
Click View. The report is displayed with the following headings:
Column
Description
Device Port
The device port.
AP Name
The name of the access point or bridge connected to the
router.
AP IP Address
The IP address of the access point or bridge connected to
the router.
Status (Fault)
The fault status.
Click for details. For more information, see Viewing Fault
Details, page 2-6.
Step 5
To export the report, click Export. (See Exporting a Report, page 4-28.)
Step 6
To email the report, click Email Report. (See Emailing a Report, page 4-28.)
Displaying Trends
This window allows you to view trends about the monitored devices in your
network. You can view, export, and email the reports.
The frequency with which performance data is aggregated is 3 hours by default.
To change the default setting, see Managing System Parameters, page 5-58.
Note
Your login determines whether you can use this option.
Following are the trend reports you can view for access points and bridges:
•
Group Performance Report: RF Throughput—See Displaying a Group
Performance Report: RF Utilization, page 4-22.
•
Group Performance Report: Number of Associations—See Displaying a
Group Performance Report: Ethernet Utilization, page 4-23.
•
AP and Bridge RF Transmission Statistics—See Displaying an AP and
Bridge RF Transmission Statistics, page 4-24.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
4-21
Chapter 4
Using Reports
Displaying Trends
•
AP and Bridge Ethernet Transmission Statistics—See Displaying an AP and
Bridge Ethernet Transmission Statistics, page 4-25.
•
AP and Bridge Performance: Graph—See Displaying an AP and Bridge
Performance: Graph, page 4-26.
•
AP and Bridge Performance: Tabular—See Displaying an AP and Bridge
Performance: Tabular, page 4-27.
Displaying a Group Performance Report: RF Utilization
Procedure
Step 1
Select Reports > Trends. The window refreshes with a device selector in the left
pane.
Step 2
From the device selector in the left pane, click the group folder for which you
want a report. The right pane refreshes.
Step 3
From the Report Name list, select Group Performance Report: RF Utilization.
Step 4
From the Start Date and End Date lists, select the start date and end date for the
period of time for which you want trending information.
Step 5
Click View. The table is displayed:
Column
Description
AP Name
The name of the access point.
IP Address
The IP address of the access point.
Timestamp
The start of the aggregate time period.
RF Utilization (%) The percentage of radio frequency utilization.
Number of
Associations
Shows the number of associations with clients.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
4-22
78-14092-01
Chapter 4
Using Reports
Displaying Trends
Step 6
To sort table data, click on the column heading you want to use to sort the data:
•
A triangle indicates ascending order.
•
An upside-down triangle indicates descending order.
•
No triangle indicates that the data is not sorted.
Step 7
To export the report, click Export. (See Exporting a Report, page 4-28.)
Step 8
To email the report, click Email Report. (See Emailing a Report, page 4-28.)
Displaying a Group Performance Report: Ethernet Utilization
Procedure
Step 1
Select Reports > Trends. The window refreshes with a device selector in the left
pane.
Step 2
From the device selector in the left pane, click the group folder for which you
want to see a report. The right pane refreshes.
Step 3
From the Report Name list, select Group Performance Report: Ethernet
Utilization.
Step 4
From the Start Date and End Date lists, select the start date and end date for the
period of time for which you want trending information.
Step 5
Click View. The table is displayed:
Column
Description
AP Name
The name of the access point.
AP IP Address
The IP address of the access point.
Timestamp
The start of the aggregate time period.
Ethernet Utilization (%)
The percentage of Ethernet utilization.
Number of Associations
Shows the number of associations with
clients.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
4-23
Chapter 4
Using Reports
Displaying Trends
Step 6
To export the report, click Export. (See Exporting a Report, page 4-28.)
Step 7
To email the report, click Email Report. (See Emailing a Report, page 4-28.)
Displaying an AP and Bridge RF Transmission Statistics
Procedure
Step 1
Select Reports > Trends. The window refreshes with a device selector in the left
pane.
Step 2
From the device selector in the left pane, click to expand the folder, then select
the devices for which you want to see a report. The right pane refreshes.
Step 3
From the Report Name list, select AP and Bridge RF Transmission Statistics.
Step 4
From the Start Date and End Date lists, select the start date and end date for the
period of time for which you want trending information.
Step 5
Click View. A graph is displayed:
Column
Description
Transmit Rate
The x-axis displays the time intervals.
The y-axis displays the number of packets transmitted per
second.
Receive Rate
The x-axis displays the time intervals.
The y-axis displays the number of packets received per
second.
Packet Errors
The x-axis displays the time intervals.
The y-axis displays the number of error packets per number
of packets.
Step 6
To export the report, click Export. (See Exporting a Report, page 4-28.)
Step 7
To email the report, click Email Report. (See Emailing a Report, page 4-28.)
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
4-24
78-14092-01
Chapter 4
Using Reports
Displaying Trends
Displaying an AP and Bridge Ethernet Transmission Statistics
Procedure
Step 1
Select Reports > Trends. The window refreshes with a device selector in the left
pane.
Step 2
From the device selector in the left pane, click to expand the folder, then select
the devices for which you want to see a report. The right pane refreshes.
Step 3
From the Report Name list, select AP and Bridge Ethernet Transmission
Statistics.
Step 4
From the Start Date and End Date lists, select the start date and end date for the
period of time for which you want trending information.
Step 5
Click View. A graph is displayed:
Column
Description
Transmit Rate
The x-axis displays the time intervals.
The y-axis displays the number of packets
transmitted per second.
Receive Rate
The x-axis displays the time intervals.
The y-axis displays the number of packets
received per second.
Packet Errors
The x-axis displays the time intervals.
The y-axis displays the number of error packets
per number of packets.
Step 6
To export the report, click Export. (See Exporting a Report, page 4-28.)
Step 7
To email the report, click Email Report. (See Emailing a Report, page 4-28.)
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
4-25
Chapter 4
Using Reports
Displaying Trends
Displaying an AP and Bridge Performance: Graph
Procedure
Step 1
Select Reports > Trends. The window refreshes with a device selector in the left
pane.
Step 2
From the device selector in the left pane, click to expand the folder you want to
view. The right pane refreshes.
Step 3
From the Report Name list, select AP and Bridge Performance Graph.
Step 4
From the Start Date list, select the start date for the graph, an d from the For a
period of list, select the number of days.
Step 5
Click View. A graph is displayed:
Column
Description
Number of Associations
The x-axis displays the time intervals.
The y-axis displays the number of client
associations
RF Utilization
The x-axis displays the time intervals.
The y-axis displays the percent of radio
frequency utilization.
Ethernet Utilization
The x-axis displays the time intervals.
The y-axis displays the percent of Ethernet
utilization.
Step 6
To export the report, click Export. (See Exporting a Report, page 4-28.)
Step 7
To email the report, click Email Report. (See Emailing a Report, page 4-28.)
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
4-26
78-14092-01
Chapter 4
Using Reports
Displaying Trends
Displaying an AP and Bridge Performance: Tabular
Procedure
Step 1
Select Reports > Trends. The window refreshes with a device selector in the left
pane.
Step 2
From the device selector in the left pane, click to expand the folder you want to
view. The right pane refreshes.
Step 3
From the Report Name list, select AP and Bridge Performance: Tabular.
Step 4
From the Start Date list, select the start date for the graph, an d from the For a
period of list, select the number of days.
Step 5
Click View. The report is displayed:
Column
Description
IP Address
The IP address of the access point or bridge.
Timestamp
The time the access point was last seen by the
system.
Number of Associations
The number of client associations.
RF Utilization
The amount of radio frequency utilization.
Ethernet Utilization
The amount of Ethernet utilization.
Step 6
To export the report, click Export. (See Exporting a Report, page 4-28.)
Step 7
To email the report, click Email Report. (See Emailing a Report, page 4-28.)
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
4-27
Chapter 4
Using Reports
Exporting a Report
Exporting a Report
Step 1
Click Export. An Export window appears.
Step 2
From the Output Format list, select the format in which you want the file exported:
CSV, PDF, or XML.
Step 3
Click Submit. A window opens in the requested format and displays the output.
Emailing a Report
Procedure
Step 1
Click Email Report. A the right pane refreshes with an Email properties dialog
box.
Step 2
Enter the following:
Field
Description
To
Enter the email address of the person to whom you want to
send the report. An entry in this field is required.
Cc
Enter email addresses of persons that you want to copy on
the email.
Subject
Enter a subject for the email.
Attachment Type
From the list, select the format in which you would like the
report sent: CSV, PDF, or XML.
Message
Enter any message you would like to send.
Report Data for
Last ‘N’ Days
This entry is applicable for Trends reports only.
From the list, select the number of days for which you want
report data emailed.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
4-28
78-14092-01
Chapter 4
Using Reports
Scheduling Email Jobs
Step 3
To cancel the email, click Cancel.
Step 4
To send the email immediately, click Send Now.
Step 5
To schedule the email for later:
a.
Click Schedule. The schedule job dialog box appears.
b.
Enter the following:
Field
Description
Job Name
Enter a name for the job.
For more information, see Naming Guidelines, page A-1.
Start Date
From the list, select the date you would like to send the
email.
Start Time
From the list, select the time you would like to send the
email.
Repeat
Step 6
Enable
Check if you want to set up a scheduled job that
periodically sends email.
Every
From the list, select the period of time you would like the
email sent.
Do one of the following:
•
Click Cancel to cancel the schedule.
•
Click Finish to complete scheduling. You receive a confirmation message
that your email has been scheduled.
To view, delete, or edit the scheduled email jobs, see Scheduling Email Jobs,
page 4-29
Scheduling Email Jobs
This window allows you to view information about email jobs you have
scheduled. It also allows you to delete them and edit them.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
4-29
Chapter 4
Using Reports
Scheduling Email Jobs
The length of time job data is retained is 30 days by default. To change the default
setting, see Managing System Parameters, page 5-58.
Note
Your login determines whether you can use this option.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Reports > Scheduled Email Jobs. The Email Jobs window appears.
Field
Description
Job Name
The name of the job.
For more information, see Naming Guidelines,
page A-1.
Step 2
Recurring
Indicates whether it is a recurring job.
Next Schedule
Indicates when the job runs again.
To sort table data, click on the column heading you want to use to sort the data:
•
A triangle indicates ascending order.
•
An upside-down triangle indicates descending order.
•
No triangle indicates that the data is not sorted.
Step 3
To delete a job, select it, then click Delete Email Job.
Step 4
To view an email job, select it, then click View Email Job. (See Viewing Email
Job Details, page 4-31.)
Step 5
To edit a job, select it, then click Edit Email Job. The email appears and allows
you to change any of the entries. (See Emailing a Report, page 4-28 for more
information.)
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
4-30
78-14092-01
Chapter 4
Using Reports
Scheduling Email Jobs
Viewing Email Job Details
The following tables are displayed in a window when you select a job in Reports
> Scheduled Email Jobs, then click View Email Job.
Report Properties
Column
Description
User Name
The name of the user who scheduled the job.
Report Type
The report type.
Report Name
The report name.
Email Properties
Column
Description
To
The username of the person to whom the
report is being emailed.
Cc
The username of the person to whom the
report is being copied.
Subject
The email subject.
Format
The format in which the report is being
emailed.
Body
The text entered into the body of the email.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
4-31
Chapter 4
Using Reports
Scheduling Email Jobs
Schedule Properties
Column
Description
Email Job Name
The name of the email job.
Start Date
The date the report is emailed.
Frequency
The frequency with which the report is to be
emailed.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
4-32
78-14092-01
5
C H A P T E R
Performing Administrative Tasks
The Administration tab allows you to you perform administrative tasks.
Note
Some of the subtabs may not be visible to some users; what you view under
the Administration tab depends on your login.
The Administration subtabs have the following functions:
•
Discover—Manage devices, configure discovery, specify device credentials,
import devices, and set up LEAP servers (see Using Discovery and Managing
Devices, page 5-2).
•
Group Management—Place devices in groups for efficient management
(see Managing Groups, page 5-28).
•
Appliance—Manage the Wireless LAN Solution Engine server (see
Managing the Appliance, page 5-34).
•
System Parameters—Configure parameters for reporting performance and
fault data (see Managing System Parameters, page 5-58).
•
User Admin—Manage users and user roles (see Administering Users,
page 5-60).
•
My Profile—Change your password (see Modifying Your Profile,
page 5-65).
•
Connectivity—Test device connectivity and reachability and troubleshoot
nonresponding devices (see Using Connectivity Tools, page 5-66).
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
5-1
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Using Discovery and Managing Devices
Using Discovery and Managing Devices
The Discover window contains the following options:
•
Discover—Set up discovery, perform an immediate discovery, and view
discovery history (see Managing Device Discovery, page 5-2).
•
Managed Devices—View newly discovered devices, change device status,
and view device management history (see Managing Devices, page 5-13).
•
Inventory—Run a one-time, immediate inventory to collect information
from managed devices before the next scheduled inventory (see Running
Inventory Now, page 5-17)
•
Device Credentials—Specify community strings and specify the HTTP
username and password for access points (see Setting Device Credentials,
page 5-17).
•
Import Devices—Import devices from a file or from a CiscoWorks2000
server (see Importing Devices, page 5-21).
•
Export Devices—Export devices to a CiscoWorks2000 server (see Exporting
Devices, page 5-24).
•
LEAP Server—Add, modify, or delete LEAP servers (see Managing LEAP
Servers, page 5-26).
Managing Device Discovery
The discovery options are:
•
Modify Discovery Settings—Set up scheduled discoveries (see Add Seed
Devices and Schedule Discovery, page 5-10).
•
Run Discovery Now—Run a one-time, immediate discovery (see Run
Discovery Now, page 5-11)
•
Discovery History—View discovery details (seeView Discovery History and
Status, page 5-12).
Related Topics
•
Overview: Discovery, page 5-3
•
Set Up Devices, page 5-4
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
5-2
78-14092-01
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Using Discovery and Managing Devices
Overview: Discovery
You can set up regularly scheduled discoveries and run one-time discoveries.
Before the WLSE can discover devices:
•
You must configure discovery on the WLSE. See Add Seed Devices and
Schedule Discovery, page 5-10.
As an alternative to using Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) to run discovery,
you can import devices from a file or from CiscoWorks2000. See Importing
Devices, page 5-21.
Note
•
Devices must be properly configured for access by the WLSE. See Set Up
Devices, page 5-4.
•
Community strings must be entered on the WLSE. See Specify Community
Strings, page 5-18).
Routers and switches are only discovered if they have properly configured
access points attached to them.
Discovery proceeds according to the seed devices and CDP distance that you
specify. The CDP distance determines the depth of the discovery. With a CDP
distance of 1, only the immediate neighbors of the seed device are discovered.
With a CDP distance of 2, devices A and B that are directly connected to the seed
device are discovered, and the immediate neighbors of A and B are also
discovered. You should set the CDP distance so that your entire wireless network
is discovered.
After devices are discovered, you must move them to the managed state.
Unmanaged devices do not appear in WLSE displays.
Related Topic
Importing Devices, page 5-21
Managing Devices, page 5-13
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
5-3
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Using Discovery and Managing Devices
Set Up Devices
You must set up devices so the WLSE can discover and manage them. This section
describes both required and optional setup tasks for:
•
Access Points and Bridges, page 5-4
•
Routers and Switches, page 5-7
•
LEAP Servers, page 5-9
Access Points and Bridges
Before you begin, Web browsing must be enabled on each access point. If Web
browsing is not enabled, attach a console to the access point and enable web
browsing.
On each access point and bridge, open a web browser session on the device and
perform the tasks in the following table.
Tasks
Procedure
1. Enable Cisco
Discovery Protocol
(CDP).
2. Enable SNMP.
1.
In the Summary Status page, click
Setup. The Cisco Services Setup
page appears.
2.
Under Services: Cisco Services, click
Cisco Discovery Protocol. The CDP
Setup page appears.
3.
Select Enabled. Click Apply or OK.
1.
In the Summary Status page, click
Setup. The Cisco Services Setup
page appears.
2.
Under Services, click SNMP. The
SNMP Setup page appears.
3.
Select Enabled.
4.
Enter a System Name, System
Location, and System Contact.
5.
Click Apply or OK.
(Optional) Set the
location.
(Optional) Set the
system name and
system contact.
Notes
CDP is required for the WLSE to
discover devices on the network.
SNMP is required for the WLSE to
discover and manage the device.
Setting the location enables proper
grouping of devices into the
system-defined Location group.
For more information, see
Managing Groups, page 5-28.
Setting the system name and
system location displays this
information when you display
device details.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
5-4
78-14092-01
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Using Discovery and Managing Devices
Tasks
3. Set the community
string by creating a
user with all
privileges.
(If you already
entered an SNMP
Admin Community
name, the user created
has Write, SNMP,
Firmware, and Admin
privileges, and the
User Manager is
enabled, you do not
need to create another
user.)
Procedure
Notes
1.
In the Summary Status page, click
Setup. The Cisco Services Setup
page appears.
2.
Under Services, click Security. The
Security Setup page appears.
3.
Click User Information; then click
Add New User. The User
Management window appears.
4.
To create an user with SNMP
read/write privileges, enter a
username and password and select
the Write, SNMP, Firmware, and
Admin capabilities.
5.
Click Apply or OK.
The username of the user with
Write and SNMP privileges is used
as the SNMP read/write
community string.
The Firmware privilege is required
for configuring devices from the
WLSE.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
5-5
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Using Discovery and Managing Devices
Tasks
Procedure
4. Add an HTTP user
with the ability to
modify firmware, and
enable the User
Manager.
You can use the same
user that you created
in Task 3, if the user
has firmware
privileges.
5. Set up TFTP as the
transfer protocol
between the WLSE
and access points.
1.
In the Summary Status page, click
Setup. The Cisco Services Setup
page appears.
2.
Click Security. The Security Setup
page appears.
3.
Click User Information; then click
Add New User. The User
Management window appears.
4.
Enter a username and password and
select Firmware; then click Apply.
5.
Navigate back to the Security Setup
page and click User Manager. The
User Manager Setup window
appears.
6.
Select Enabled; then click Apply or
OK.
1.
In the Summary Status page, click
Setup. The Cisco Services Setup
page appears.
2.
Under Services, click FTP. The FTP
Setup page appears.
3.
Use the pulldown menu to select
TFTP as the file transfer protocol.
4.
In the Default File Server text box,
enter the IP address of the WLSE.
5.
Click Apply or OK.
Notes
This allows configuration uploads
from the WLSE to the access point.
All access points must be
configured with the same HTTP
user and password. You also enter
this user and password on the
WLSE (see Specify the HTTP
Username and Password,
page 5-20).
TFTP is used for transferring
configuration changes to access
points.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
5-6
78-14092-01
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Using Discovery and Managing Devices
Routers and Switches
Only routers and switches that have properly configured access points or
bridges attached to them will be discovered.
Note
On each router and switch, configure the following:
Task
1. Enable CDP
and verify that
access points and
bridges are
visible from the
router or switch.
Procedure
Notes
1.
Enter enable mode.
2.
Verify that CDP is running on the switch or
router:
CDP is required for the
WLSE to discover the
device.
On IOS-based devices, use the show cdp run
command.
On Hybrid OS-based Catalyst switches, use the
show cdp command
3.
If CDP is not running, use the set cdp enable
command to enable CDP.
4.
To verify that access points or bridges are
visible in the device’s CDP table, use the show
cdp neighbors command.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
5-7
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Using Discovery and Managing Devices
Task
Procedure
Notes
2. Enable SNMP
and set up
community
strings.
On IOS-based devices, enter configuration mode and SNMP is required for the
WLSE to discover and
use the snmp community community_string ro
manage the device.
command.
On Hybrid OS-based Catalyst devices, enter enable
mode and use the set snmp community read-only
community_string command.
3. (Optional) Set On IOS-based devices, enter configuration mode and
the system name, use the following commands.
contact, and
• To set the system name, use the hostname name
location
command.
variables.
• To set the system contact, use the snmp contact
contact command.
•
To set the location, use the snmp location
location command.
These variables make the
device more manageable.
The location variable
enables proper grouping of
devices into the
system-defined Location
group. For more information
about groups, see Managing
Groups, page 5-28.
On Hybrid OS-based Catalyst switches, enter enable The system name, system
contact, and location will
mode and use the following commands:
appear in the device detail
• To set the system name, use the set system
displays.
name name command.
•
To set the system contact, use the set system
contact contact command.
•
To set the location, use the set system location
location command.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
5-8
78-14092-01
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Using Discovery and Managing Devices
LEAP Servers
The WLSE can monitor a LEAP server (CiscoSecure ACS Server) that provides
LEAP services to a wireless LAN using synthetic transactions.
Note
Each LEAP server must be specified on the WLSE. For more information, see
Managing LEAP Servers, page 5-26.
Procedure
To set up a LEAP server and add the WLSE as a Network Access Server (NAS)
on the LEAP server:
Step 1
Log into the CiscoSecure ACS Server.
Step 2
Click User Setup on the left side of the initial page. The User Setup page appears.
Step 3
In the User text box, enter the name of the user that the WLSE will use for
synthetic transactions.
Step 4
Click Add/Edit; then enter the appropriate information for the user, including the
password. Click Submit.
Step 5
Click Network Configuration on the left side of the page. The Network
Configuration screen appears.
Step 6
Click Add Entry. The Add Access Server screen appears.
Step 7
Enter the WLSE information in the following text boxes:
•
Network Access Server Hostname
•
Network Access Server IP
•
Key (the shared key)
Step 8
Select RADIUS (Cisco Aironet) from the Authenticate Using list.
Step 9
Click Submit or Submit+Restart. A restart is required for the changes to take
effect.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
5-9
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Using Discovery and Managing Devices
Add Seed Devices and Schedule Discovery
Neighbors of seed devices are discovered by examining the contents of CDP
tables. Before discovery can proceed, you must specify at least one seed device.
Any supported device can function as a seed.
You may want to specify multiple seed devices to:
Note
•
Shorten the discovery time.
•
Discover “disconnected” networks; that is, discover devices across links on
which CDP is disabled or discover devices outside the firewall.
Your login determines whether you can use this option.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Administration > Discover > Discover > Modify Discovery Settings.
Step 2
To delete a seed device, select the IP address from the Seed Values list and click
Delete.
Step 3
To add a seed device, enter its IP address in the Seed Values text box and click >>.
Note
Before you can modify the discovery schedule, you must have at least
one seed device in the Seed Values list.
Step 4
Repeat step 3 to add more seed devices.
Step 5
Select the CDP distance from the list. Set CDP distance appropriately to discover
the entire wireless network; a CDP distance of 1 only discovers the immediate
neighbors of the seed devices.
Note
Step 6
Routers and switches that do not have access points attached to them
are used when computing CDP distance. However, such devices will
not appear in the discovered devices list.
To schedule discovery, click Next: Modify Schedule. The Modify Discovery
Schedule dialog box appears.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
5-10
78-14092-01
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Using Discovery and Managing Devices
•
Select the State Date and Start Time from the pulldown lists.
•
To repeat discovery at specified intervals, click Enable. Then enter a number
and select the interval from the Every list.
Step 7
Click Next. The CDP Discovery - Summary dialog box appears.
Step 8
Click Finish to submit your settings or Back to make changes in your settings.
Run Discovery Now
This option allows you to run an immediate one-time discovery.
Note
Your login determines whether you can use this option.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Administration > Discover > Discover > Run Discovery Now. The
Discovery - Seeds dialog box appears.
Step 2
If necessary, add seed devices:
Note
Step 3
If you add seed devices in the Discovery - Seeds dialog box, they will
not be saved. Any seed devices added here are used for this one-time
discovery only.
a.
Enter the seed device’s IP address in the Add Seed Value text box and
click >>.
b.
Set the CDP distance by selecting a number from the list.
Click Run Now. The Discovery - Summary dialog box appears.
•
Click Back if you want to make changes.
•
Click Finish to run the discovery. The discovery will begin within 2 minutes.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
5-11
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Using Discovery and Managing Devices
View Discovery History and Status
The Discovery History table shows completed and scheduled discovery jobs.
Note
Your login determines whether you can use this option.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Administration > Discover > Discover > Discovery History. The
Discovery History table appears:
Field
Description
Discovery Name
The job name. The scheduled discovery is called
CDPDiscovery. One-time discoveries and discoveries
initiated by device imports are called
CDPDiscovery_type_number; for example,
CDPDiscovery_Import_Devices_4.
Recurring
Whether the job is recurring.
Schedule Time
The next time the job will run.
Note
If the Discovery History table grows too large, you can reset the Job
History Truncation Interval parameter in Administration > System
Parameters so that the table is truncated more often. For more
information on this parameter, see Managing System Parameters,
page 5-58.
Step 2
From the Discovery State list, select the discoveries you want to view: scheduled
discoveries, discoveries that are currently running, or all discoveries. The
Discovery History table is displayed.
Step 3
To view more information about a discovery in the Discovery History table, select
the radio button and click Discovery Run Detail. This Discovery Run Details
window appears, showing the Discovery Start and End times.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
5-12
78-14092-01
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Using Discovery and Managing Devices
Step 4
Step 5
To view the detailed log for a particular discovery run, select the run and click
Discovery Run Log. The following information is displayed in the Discovery
Run Log:
•
The seed devices used.
•
The CDP distance configured for the seed devices.
•
When the discovery started and ended (displayed as UTC).
•
The number of devices that were discovered or rediscovered.
•
A list of the devices that were discovered. Devices listed as being updated
were already discovered in a previous discovery run.
•
A list of devices that were previously discovered but are now unreachable.
•
Devices that are unreachable because CDP is not enabled on the device or
SNMP is not configured on the device.
To sort table data, click on the column heading by which you want to sort the data:
•
A triangle indicates ascending order.
•
An upside-down triangle indicates descending order.
•
No triangle indicates that the data is not sorted.
Managing Devices
Before you can view devices or perform any operations on them, you must move
the devices to the managed state. The device management options are:
•
Manage/Unmanage—View newly discovered devices, change device
management status, or delete devices (see Manage Devices, page 5-13).
•
Device History—View the management history of each discovered device
(see View Device Management History, page 5-16).
Manage Devices
You can use this option to change a device’s management status or delete a
device.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
5-13
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Using Discovery and Managing Devices
Note
Your login determines whether you can use this option.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Administration > Discover > Managed Devices > Manage/Unmanage.
The device selector is displayed, showing:
•
Newly discovered devices (New folder). All new devices are also listed in the
Unmanaged folder.
•
Managed devices (Managed folder)
•
Unmanaged devices (Unmanaged folder).
Step 2
To view the contents of a folder, expand the folder.
Step 3
To modify the status of the devices in a folder, click the folder name. The Group
Status pane appears. Select one or more devices from the list and click Manage
or Unmanage in the Group Change Status window. Devices are moved into the
Managed or Unmanaged folders.
You must move newly discovered devices to the managed state. Only managed
devices appear in WLSE displays.
Note
Step 4
You can only manage a total of 525 access points and wireless bridges.
After you have placed 500 of these devices into the Managed folder,
warning messages are displayed when you place more devices in the
folder. After the 525 limit is reached, no more devices can be placed
in the Managed folder. Discovery of access points and wireless
bridges is not limited to 525 devices.
After you move devices to the managed state, it is recommended that you run
inventory. This ensures that devices appear in displays such as reports and
system-defined groups without waiting for the next inventory cycle. To run
inventory:
a.
Select Administration > Discover > Discover > Inventory.
b.
Click Run Inventory.
For more information, see Running Inventory Now, page 5-17.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
5-14
78-14092-01
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Using Discovery and Managing Devices
Step 5
To view details about a device, select the device from the device selector. The
Device Details pane appears. You can change the device’s status by using the
Manage and Unmanage buttons.
Note
Some details may not be displayed if the corresponding parameters are
not set on the device; for example, Location and Contact.
The details in the Device Details pane are:
Step 6
Field
Description
Device Name
Hostname or IP address.
Description
Detailed device description.
Version
Software version installed on the device.
Device Family
Device type.
SysName
The system name.
SysObjectId
Unique identifier that identifies the device type.
Location
Where the device is located.
IP Address
Device IP address.
Subnet
Subnet in which the device is located.
Network Segment
The network segment in which the device is located.
Contact
The person to contact for this device.
To delete a device, select the device from the device selector or dialog box and
click Delete.
The device will be removed from the device selector and from all tables
(including trend tables).
Related Topics
Managing Device Discovery, page 5-2
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
5-15
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Using Discovery and Managing Devices
View Device Management History
The Historical Operations table shows information on all changes in device state
(from unmanaged to managed or vice versa).
Note
Your login determines whether you can use this option.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To view the Historical Operations table, select Administration > Discover >
Managed Devices > Device History. The following information is displayed:
Field
Description
Timestamp
Date and time when the state change occurred.
Device Name
The device’s hostname.
IP Address
The device’s IP address.
State
The device’s state:
•
New—Device was discovered but has not been moved to
the managed or unmanaged state.
•
Managed—Device has been moved to the managed state.
•
Unmanaged—Device is unmanaged.
To sort table data, click on the column heading by which you want to sort the data:
•
A triangle indicates ascending order.
•
An upside-down triangle indicates descending order.
•
No triangle indicates that the data is not sorted.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
5-16
78-14092-01
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Using Discovery and Managing Devices
Running Inventory Now
By default, the WLSE collects device configuration information every hour. You
can use this option to run a one-time, immediate inventory. Running an immediate
inventory after you move devices to the managed state is recommended so you can
see the devices in displays such as reports and system-defined groups, without
waiting for the next scheduled inventory cycle.
To change the scheduled inventory interval, you can reset the Inventory Polling
Interval parameter. See Managing System Parameters, page 5-58.
Note
Your login determines whether you can use this option
Procedure
Step 1
Select Administration > Discover > Discover > Inventory.
Step 2
Click Run Inventory. The inventory job will start within 2 minutes. A
confirmation message appears, managed devices are polled, and configuration
information is collected. WLSE displays will be updated accordingly.
If a scheduled inventory or previous immediate inventory is already running, a
message appears. You should wait for the running inventory to complete before
starting another immediate inventory.
Setting Device Credentials
This option allows you specify device community strings and HTTP credentials.
•
SNMP Communities—Specify community strings for managed devices. See
Specify Community Strings, page 5-18.
•
HTTP User/Password—Specify the HTTP username and password for
configuring access points. See Specify the HTTP Username and Password,
page 5-20.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
5-17
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Using Discovery and Managing Devices
Specify Community Strings
The Wireless LAN Solution Engine uses a device’s read-only community string
for discovery and the read/write community string to configure the device. If
community strings are not entered correctly, the Wireless LAN Solution Engine
cannot communicate with the device. Both read-only and read/write community
strings are required.
The default community string is public for both the read-only string and the
read-write string. If the community strings on your devices differ from the
defaults, you must specify the community strings before the discovery process can
begin and before you can configure the devices.
Note
Your login determines whether you can use this option.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Administration > Discover > Device Credentials > SNMP
Communities. The Bulk SNMP Settings dialog box appears.
This dialog box contains a default entry that covers all devices, provided device
community strings are set to the default (public).
Step 2
Add new entries or modify existing entries in the text box using the following
syntax:
target:read_community::timeout:retries:::write_community
Note
You must enter the correct number of colons between variables.
Otherwise, the community strings cannot be read.
Information about the variables follows. For more details, see Community String
Guidelines, page 5-20.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
5-18
78-14092-01
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Using Discovery and Managing Devices
Variable
Description
target
A device or range of devices that If you do not specify a target, the default
use these community strings.
community strings apply to all devices in the
network.
read_community
A password allowing read-only
access to the target devices.
You must specify a read community string.
Otherwise, the default value of public is used.
timeout
The length of time (seconds) the
server waits for a response from
the device before performing the
first retry.
The default is 10 seconds. If you increase the
timeout period, discovery could take
significantly longer to complete. The
minimum value is one and the maximum
value is 60.
retries
The number of times the server
attempts to communicate with
the device before declaring that
the device has timed out.
The default is one retry. If you increase the
number of retries, discovery takes
significantly longer to complete. The default
retry policy doubles the previous timeout
value for retry.
write_community
The password that allows write
access to the target devices.
You must specify the write community string.
Otherwise, the default value of public is used.
Step 3
Step 4
Notes
Select Reverse DNS Lookup if DNS is configured on the device.
•
If DNS Lookup fails, the device IP address will be used; however, discovery
will take longer.
•
If DNS Lookup succeeds, the WLSE displays will show the device’s
hostname instead of the IP address in device name fields.
Click Save to apply your changes.
Related Topic
Community String Guidelines, page 5-20
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
5-19
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Using Discovery and Managing Devices
Community String Guidelines
Use these guidelines when adding or modifying community strings:
•
You can assign community strings to any of the following:
– Complete IP address; for example, 172.20.4.9
– Any wild cards (based on IP addresses); for example:
*.*.*.*
172.*.*.*
– Address ranges, which can include wild cards; for example:
27.20.[4-55].*
172.[21-30].[44-88].*
172.*.*.[121-255]
•
You can add a combination of general and specific entries, but the Wireless
LAN Solution Engine reads the community strings from most specific to least
specific.
•
If you enter duplicate community strings for a device, the most specific
community string is used.
•
A # sign as the first character on a line indicates a comment.
•
All printable characters, except for colons (:), are allowed in community
strings.
•
Spaces are not allowed in community strings.
Specify the HTTP Username and Password
The HTTP username and password are required for downloading configuration
files to access points. The password must be set on each access point. For more
information, see Set Up Devices, page 5-4.
Note
Your login determines whether you can use this option.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
5-20
78-14092-01
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Using Discovery and Managing Devices
Procedure
Step 1
Select Administration > Discover > Device Credentials > HTTP
User/Password.
Step 2
Enter a username or modify the username in the User field.
Step 3
Enter or modify the password in the Password field.
Step 4
Enter or modify the password in the Confirm Password field.
Step 5
Click Save.
Related Topic
Chapter 3, “Configuring Devices”
Importing Devices
Instead of running discovery on the WLSE, you can import devices:
•
From a file (see Import Devices from a File, page 5-22).
•
From CiscoWorks2000 Resource Manager Essentials (see Import Devices
from CiscoWorks2000, page 5-23).
A one-time discovery job starts within 2 minutes after you import devices. All
WLSE-supported devices in the file are used as seed devices with a CDP distance
of 1. These devices are not added to the list of available seed devices in the
Discovery - Configuring Seeds dialog box, but they do appear in the Discovery
Run Log. See Add Seed Devices and Schedule Discovery, page 5-10 and View
Discovery History and Status, page 5-12.
Devices not supported by the WLSE are ignored.
You can choose to discover some devices and import others.
The following information is imported:
•
IP addresses are accepted, and hostnames are resolved to obtain the IP
address. Hostnames that cannot be resolved are ignored.
•
Read-only and read/write community strings are appended to the end of the
Bulk SNMP Settings table (Administration > Discover > Device
Credentials). See Setting Device Credentials, page 5-17.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
5-21
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Using Discovery and Managing Devices
Note
Imported credentials are not matched with existing entries that
contain wildcards or ranges.
Import Devices from a File
You can import devices from a file that contains device information in the CSV
format. You can create a CSV file by exporting devices from CiscoWorks2000 or
by creating the file with a text editor. You can view a sample CSV file in the dialog
box for importing files.
Note
Your login determines whether you can use this option.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Administration > Discover > Import Devices > From File. The Import
Devices from File dialog box appears.
To see a sample file, click See Sample CSV File.
Step 2
You can enter a pathname for the file in the Choose File dialog box or click
Browse to find the file in the client directory structure.
Step 3
Click Import. Devices are imported and a one-time discovery begins within
2 minutes.
Step 4
To verify the discovery, see View Discovery History and Status, page 5-12.
Related Topics
•
Import Devices from CiscoWorks2000, page 5-23
•
Add Seed Devices and Schedule Discovery, page 5-10
•
Setting Device Credentials, page 5-17
•
View Discovery History and Status, page 5-12
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
5-22
78-14092-01
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Using Discovery and Managing Devices
Import Devices from CiscoWorks2000
You can import devices directly from CiscoWorks2000 by connecting to a
CiscoWorks2000 server.
The time required to import devices depends on the response from the
CiscoWorks2000 server and the number of devices imported. The following
procedure explains how to check the status of the operation.
Note
Your login determines whether you can use this option.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Administration > Discover > Import Devices > From CiscoWorks2000.
Step 2
Enter the following information. All fields are required; if any are left blank, the
display will clear.
•
The CiscoWorks2000 server IP address.
•
The port number at which the CiscoWorks2000 server listens for HTTP
requests. You may need to contact the administrator of the CiscoWorks2000
server to obtain this information.
•
The username and password of any user who has the authority to export and
import device credentials on the CiscoWorks2000 server.
Click Import. After devices are imported, a one-time discovery begins.
Step 3
To see the Import Status log, click Status. The CiscoWorks2000 Import Status
window appears. To refresh the status display, click Refresh.
•
If the Last Status button is displayed in place of the Status button, you can
review the results of a previous import.
•
If the import fails because you entered the wrong data in the Import dialog
box, one of the following error messages is included in the Import Status log:
– The following message means that either the host or the port specified in
the WLSE import dialog was wrong:
Error: Could not connect to CiscoWorks2000 server:ip_address on
port:port_number.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
5-23
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Using Discovery and Managing Devices
– The following message means that either the user or password specified
in the WLSE import dialog was wrong:
Error: Connected to CiscoWorks2000 server:ip_address on
port:port_number successfully, but server returned error after
connection.
•
If the import succeeds, you can view detailed information in the Discovery
Run Log. See View Discovery History and Status, page 5-12.
Related Topics
•
Import Devices from a File, page 5-22
•
Add Seed Devices and Schedule Discovery, page 5-10
Exporting Devices
You can export all WLSE-discovered devices to a CiscoWorks2000 server
running Resource Manager Essentials. The information exported consists of the
device IP addresses and their credentials.
The time required to export devices depends on the number of devices exported
and the response from the CiscoWorks2000 server. The following procedure
explains how to check the status of the operation.
Note
Your login determines whether you can use this option.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Administration > Discover > Export Devices > To CiscoWorks2000.
Step 2
Enter the following information:
•
The CiscoWorks2000 server IP address.
•
The CiscoWorks2000 server port number. You may need to contact the
administrator of the CiscoWorks2000 server.
•
The username and password of any user who has the authority to export and
import device credentials on the CiscoWorks2000 server.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
5-24
78-14092-01
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Using Discovery and Managing Devices
Step 3
Click Export.
The Export to CiscoWorks2000 Started window appears.
Step 4
To see the export status log, click Status. The CiscoWorks2000 Export Status
window appears. To refresh the status display, click Refresh.
If the Last Status button is displayed in place of the Status button, you can review
the results of a previous export.
The following information is included in the export status log:
Type of Information Description
Device
information
Name of the device, device status, and device status details.
Error messages
The following message means that either the host or the
port specified in the WLSE export dialog was wrong:
The string !{[NO VALUE]}! does not indicate an error; it
means information was not available to the
CiscoWorks2000 server while it was sending a response to
the WLSE.
Error: Could not connect to CiscoWorks2000
server:ip_address on port:port_number.
The following message means that either the user or
password specified in the WLSE export dialog was wrong:
Error: Connected to CiscoWorks2000 server:ip_address on
port:port_number successfully, but server returned error
after connection.
After you export devices, you can view the exported devices in CiscoWorks2000
Resource Manager Essentials (see the Resource Manager Essentials online help
for details).
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
5-25
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Using Discovery and Managing Devices
Managing LEAP Servers
This window allows you to manage LEAP servers (CiscoSecure ACS Servers).
LEAP servers monitor the authentication servers, detecting performance
problems and ensuring availability. LEAP servers must be configured for
synthetic transactions.
After you save LEAP server credentials, the WLSE automatically performs
periodic LEAP logins to monitor the response time and availability of LEAP
servers. To change the default polling interval and fault thresholds, select Faults
> Specify Fault Thresholds > LEAP > Response Time.
A LEAP server must be set up for LEAP logins. For information on setting up
LEAP servers, see Set Up Devices, page 5-4.
You can use the LEAP server options to:
•
Add a LEAP Server, page 5-26
•
Modify a LEAP Server, page 5-27
•
Remove a LEAP Server, page 5-28
Related Topics
•
Setting LEAP Server Response Time, page 2-12
•
Displaying Faults, page 2-1
•
Specifying Fault Thresholds, page 2-7
•
Specifying Policies, page 2-13
•
Forwarding Faults, page 2-15
Add a LEAP Server
Note
Your login determines whether you can use this option.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Administration > Discover > LEAP SERVER > Add Server. The LEAP
Server: Add Server dialog box appears.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
5-26
78-14092-01
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Using Discovery and Managing Devices
Step 2
Step 3
Complete the following:
Text Box
Description
Server Name
Enter the name of the server.
Server Port
Enter the number of the port the server uses for
authentication.
Username
Enter the LEAP username.
Password
Enter the LEAP password.
Secret
Enter the shared secret key.
Click Submit to apply your settings, or Reset to apply the default values.
Modify a LEAP Server
Note
Your login determines whether you can use this option.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Administration > Discover > LEAP Server > Modify Server. The LEAP
Server: Modify Server dialog box appears.
Step 2
Modify attributes as desired:
Text Box
Description
Server Name
From the list, select the server name you want to modify.
Server Port
Modify the port number used for authentication.
Username
Change the LEAP server name.
Password
Change the LEAP password
Secret
Change the shared secret.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
5-27
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Managing Groups
Step 3
Click Submit to apply your settings, or Reset to apply the default values.
Remove a LEAP Server
Note
Your login determines whether you can use this option.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Administration > Discover > LEAP Server > Remove Server. The LEAP
Server: Remove Server dialog box appears.
Step 2
From the list, select the server you want to remove, then click Submit.
Managing Groups
This window contains a group selector and a dialog box for creating, editing, and
deleting groups.
Related Topics
•
Overview: Groups, page 5-28
•
Creating, Editing, and Deleting Groups, page 5-29
Overview: Groups
The Group Management window allows you to view the existing device groups
and categorize devices into named groups so that you can perform management
tasks on a group of devices as a single operation.
A group is a named entity consisting of a set of devices, a set of groups, or a
combination of devices and groups. A group can consist of both user-defined
groups and system-defined groups.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
5-28
78-14092-01
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Managing Groups
There are five folders containing system-defined groups. You cannot edit or delete
a system-defined group. The system defined groups are automatically populated
using information read from the devices during discovery and inventory
collection. Any changes on devices are reflected in the system-defined groups
only after the next discovery or inventory collection has completed. The
system-defined groups and folders are:
•
Device Type folder—Contains groups for 1200 APs, 340 APs, 350 APs, 350
Bridges, Routers, and Switches.
•
Location folder—Contains groups based on the locations of the devices. To
enable creation of system-defined location groups, you must configure a
parameter on the device that identifies the device location. See Set Up
Devices, page 5-4 for information on setting location. The null location group
contains all devices that are not configured with their location information.
•
SSID folder—Contains a group for each radio service set ID (SSID)
configured on access points. For information on configuring the SSID, see Set
Up Devices, page 5-4
•
Subnet folder—Contains a group for each subnet configured in the network.
•
Software Version folder—Contains a group for each software version
detected on the devices.
Related Topics
•
Managing Device Discovery, page 5-2
•
Running Inventory Now, page 5-17
Creating, Editing, and Deleting Groups
You can create groups and edit or delete groups that were created by users. The
system-defined groups cannot be edited or deleted.
Use the options in the Group Management window to:
•
Add a Group, page 5-30
•
Edit a Group, page 5-32
•
Delete a Group, page 5-33
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
5-29
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Managing Groups
To view the devices in a group, select Administration > Group Management.
Click a group folder in the group selector in the left pane. The group name,
description, creator, and devices are listed in the Group window.
Add a Group
You can add groups by:
Note
•
Creating a New Group, page 5-30
•
Copying an Existing Group, page 5-31
Your login determines whether you can use this option.
Creating a New Group
Procedure
Step 1
Select Administration > Group Management. The group selector pane and
group window are displayed.
The group selector lists all the current groups, both system-defined groups and
user-defined groups. The number after a group name or folder shows how many
devices are in the group or how many groups are in the folder. Every managed
device appears in one or more of the system-defined groups, and may also appear
in user-defined groups.
Step 2
To create a new group, click Create New. The Create Group dialog appears.
Step 3
Enter a name in the Name text box. Enter a description in the Description text box
(optional).
For information about the characters allowed in group names and descriptions, see
Naming Guidelines, page A-1.
Step 4
From the group selector in the left pane, select a group that contains devices you
want to add to your new group. Devices in that group are added to the All
Available Devices list in the Create Group dialog.
Step 5
To add devices to the new group, select the group or individual devices from the
All Available Devices list and click Add >>. Devices are moved to the Devices in
Group list.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
5-30
78-14092-01
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Managing Groups
Step 6
To add more devices to the new group, repeat Steps 4 and 5.
Step 7
To remove devices from the group, select them from the Devices in Group list and
click Remove.
Step 8
To save the group, click Save. The new group is displayed and added to the end
of the group selector list. To cancel the group creation and discard your changes,
click Cancel.
Copying an Existing Group
Use this procedure to create a new group by copying an existing group.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Administration > Group Management. The group selector pane and
group dialog box are displayed.
The group selector lists all the current groups, both system-defined groups and
user-defined groups. The number after a group name or folder show how many
devices are in the group or how many groups are in the folder. Every discovered
and managed device appears in one or more of the system-defined groups, and
may also appear in user-defined groups.
Step 2
To copy an existing group, select the group and click Copy. The Copy Group
dialog appears. The devices in the group are placed in the Devices in Group list.
Step 3
Edit the name, if desired. Add a description in the Description text box (optional).
For information about the characters allowed in group names and descriptions, see
Naming Guidelines, page A-1.
Step 4
To add more devices to the group, select another existing group. Devices in that
group are added to the All Available Devices list in the Create Group dialog.
Step 5
Select the group or individual devices from the All Available Devices list and
click Add >>.
Step 6
To add more devices, repeat Steps 4 and 5.
Step 7
To remove devices from the group, select them from the Devices in Group list and
click Remove.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
5-31
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Managing Groups
Step 8
To save the group, click Save. The new group is displayed and added to the end
of the group selector list. To cancel the group creation and discard your changes,
click Cancel.
Related Topics
•
Edit a Group, page 5-32
•
Delete a Group, page 5-33
•
Overview: Groups, page 5-28
Edit a Group
You can edit user-defined groups, but system-defined groups cannot be edited.
Note
Your login determines whether you can use this option.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Administration > Group Management. The group selector pane and
Group dialog box appear.
Step 2
Select a group to edit from the group selector in the left pane and click Edit. The
Edit Group dialog appears.
Step 3
Change the Name or Description by editing the text in the text boxes.
For information about the characters allowed in group names and descriptions, see
Naming Guidelines, page A-1.
Step 4
To add devices to the group, select a group from the group selector. The devices
in the group appear in the All Available Devices list. Select the group or individual
devices from the list and click Add. Devices are placed in the Devices in Group
list.
Step 5
To add more devices, repeat Step 4.
Step 6
To delete devices from the group, select one or more devices from the Devices in
the Group list and click Remove.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
5-32
78-14092-01
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Managing Groups
Step 7
To save your changes, click Save. The edited group is displayed. To discard your
changes, click Cancel.
Related Topics
•
Add a Group, page 5-30
•
Delete a Group, page 5-33
•
Overview: Groups, page 5-28
Delete a Group
You can delete user-defined groups, but you cannot delete system-defined groups.
Note
Your login determines whether you can use this option.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Administration > Group Management. The group selector appears in the
left pane and the Group window appears.
Step 2
Select the group from the group selector list. The group is displayed.
Step 3
Click Delete.
Related Topic
•
Overview: Groups, page 5-28
•
Edit a Group, page 5-32
•
Add a Group, page 5-30
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
5-33
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Managing the Appliance
Managing the Appliance
The Appliance window contains the following options:
Note
•
Status—Gather and view WLSE statistics and restart the machine (see
Viewing WLSE Status, page 5-34).
•
Software—Update, reinstall, view status, and define the repository for the
WLSE software (see Managing the Software, page 5-37).
•
Security—Manage the WLSE security features, such as telnet, SSL,
authentication modules (see Managing Security, page 5-45).
•
Backup and Restore—Configure backup location, backup data, and restore
data (see Backing Up and Restoring Data, page 5-50).
•
Diagnostics—Troubleshoot, run self-tests, view process status (see Using
Diagnostics, page 5-52).
•
Splash Screen—Customize the splash screen message (see Setting Up the
Splash Screen Message, page 5-57).
Your login determines whether you can use these options.
Viewing WLSE Status
The Status options include:
•
Log file statistics (see Viewing Log File Reports, page 5-35).
•
Restart (see Restarting the Wireless LAN Solution Engine, page 5-36).
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
5-34
78-14092-01
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Managing the Appliance
Viewing Log File Reports
This option allows you to gather and view file system statistics.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Administration > Appliance > Status > View Log File. The Log File
Utilities dialog box appears with the following information:
Field
Description
Log file
Name of the log file displayed.
Directory
Location of log file.
File Size
Size of file.
Size Limit
Recommended maximum file size.
File Size Utilization %
Percentage of the maximum size
(500MB) being used.
Step 2
To see log file details, click the name of the log file. A window appears with log
file information.
Step 3
To search for specific data within the log files, click the check boxes of the log
files you want to search, and enter a keyword into the Keyword text box. Click
Case Sensitive if you want your search to be case sensitive, then click Search. A
window displays the results of the search.
Log Files Displayed
Log File
Content
access_log
Web server user access log.
daemons.log
Log file for logging messages that dmgtd does not log.
dmgtd.log
Process Management daemon log file.
error_log
Web server error log.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
5-35
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Managing the Appliance
Log File
Content
faults.log
Log for device fault information.
install.log
Software package installation log.
jobvm.log
Log for all scheduled tasks.
mfgtest.log
Log for the manufacturing test.
mod_jk.log
Message log for hook between Tomcat and Apache.
snmpd.log
SNMP agent log file.
ssl_request_log
Log for secure socket layer web server events for https.
tomcat.log
Java servlet messages.
Restarting the Wireless LAN Solution Engine
This option allows you to restart the WLSE.
After the Wireless LAN Solution Engine restarts, discovery (see Managing
Device Discovery, page 5-2) will begin immediately, the performance thresholds
will resume collecting, the views will update, and all other functions will resume.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Administration > Appliance > Status > Restart. The Restart System
screen appears.
Step 2
Click OK to restart the Wireless LAN Solution Engine.
Note
If you need to perform a manual soft restart (for example, when
modifying a network interface) you can use the CLI commands. (Refer
to User Guide for the CiscoWorks1105 Wireless LAN Solution
Engine—From the Online Help, click View PDF.)
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
5-36
78-14092-01
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Managing the Appliance
Managing the Software
The Software options include:
•
Status—Currently installed software information, such as software
description, installation date, and installation status (see Viewing Software
Status, page 5-37).
•
Define Repository—Specify the repository location. The repository provides
software update services to the WLSE (see Defining the Repository,
page 5-38).
•
Software Updates—Select and install a software update from the repository.
You must specify the repository before updating software so the Wireless
LAN Solution Engine can locate the software updates (see Installing
Software Updates, page 5-41).
•
Browse Repository—Browse the available complete images and software
upgrades on the repository (see Browsing the Repository, page 5-43).
•
Software Update History— Information about current and previous
versions of installed software, including version number, install date, and
installation status (see Viewing Software Update History, page 5-44).
Viewing Software Status
Procedure
Step 1
Select Administration > Appliance > Software > Status. The Software Status
window appears with the Installed Software table, which contains the following
information about all the software currently installed on the Wireless LAN
Solution Engine:
Field
Description
Software Name
Brief description of the software.
Installation Date
Date and time (UTC) the software was installed.
Status
Status of the installation.
Details
Detailed install log for this software.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
5-37
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Managing the Appliance
The Last Installation Information table displays the following about the most
recent software installation:
Step 2
Field
Description
Name
Brief description of the software.
Installation Status
Status of the installation.
Log File
Detailed install log for this software.
To view details about an installation, click View Log in the Details field.
The install log for the selected installation opens. The information about the latest
software installed is displayed.
Related Topics
•
Viewing Software Update History, page 5-44
•
Installing Software Updates, page 5-41
•
Managing the Software, page 5-37
Defining the Repository
The repository warehouses the available software updates for the WLSE. The
repository can be either local (on the Wireless LAN Solution Engine), or remote
(on a Windows NT or Windows 2000 server). The default is a local repository.
By defining the repository, you are telling the WLSE where to look for available
software updates. You can download software from the repository and install it on
the Wireless LAN Solution Engine, and you can browse the available software
versions on the repository.
However, before you can define the repository using the GUI, you must first
create the repository:
•
To create a local repository, see Creating a Local Repository, page 5-39.
•
To create a remote repository, see Creating a Remote Repository, page 5-40.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
5-38
78-14092-01
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Managing the Appliance
Procedure
Step 1
Select Administration > Appliance > Software > Define Repository. The
Define Repository dialog box appears.
Step 2
To define or redefine the repository, complete the following:
Step 3
Text Box
Description
Host Name
The hostname or IP address of the repository. For the local
repository, enter localhost.
Port Number
The port number used by the software on the repository.
The default port number for the local repository is 9851.
Description
A description of the repository. This text box is optional;
you can enter any description.
Click Connect to Repository to verify that the hostname and port number you
entered are correct. If the data is incorrect, an error message appears.
Related Topics
•
Installing Software Updates, page 5-41
•
Browsing the Repository, page 5-43
•
Managing the Software, page 5-37
Creating a Local Repository
The repository warehouses the available software updates for the Wireless LAN
Solution Engine. A single Wireless LAN Solution Engine can serve as the
repository for itself and multiple other Wireless LAN Solution Engines.
To create a local repository, configure the repository using the CLI.
Note
To use the local repository, you must be downloading software updates from
an FTP site.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
5-39
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Managing the Appliance
For more information, see Installing and Configuring the Cisco 1105 Wireless
LAN Solution Engine, “Updating your Wireless LAN Solution Engine” section.
Procedure
Step 1
Open a CLI window to the Wireless LAN Solution Engine.
Step 2
Specify the source of the software updates. Use the following CLI command:
repository source ftp://hostname/path
The FTP site is the source for downloading software updates.
Step 3
Find the software you want on the FTP site.
Step 4
Download the software you want from the FTP site to the repository using the
following command:
repository add package
Creating a Remote Repository
The repository warehouses the available software updates for the Wireless LAN
Solution Engine. A remote repository can serve as the repository for one or more
Wireless LAN Solution Engines. One Wireless LAN Solution Engine can function
as the remote repository for other Wireless LAN Solution Engines, or the remote
repository can be a Windows NT or Windows 2000 server. (A remote repository
created on a Windows NT or Windows 2000 server will be temporary. It will not
exist after the server reboots.)
Note
If you are using a Wireless LAN Solution Engine as a remote repository, see
Creating a Local Repository, page 5-39.
Procedure
Step 1
Download the ZIP file containing the update. The latest updates can be found at
ftp.cisco.com.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
5-40
78-14092-01
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Managing the Appliance
Step 2
Extract the file to any empty directory. For example, extract the file to
C:\hse\hse_repository.
Step 3
Open a command window and enter the following command:
subst <drive2:><drive1:>\<path>
Note
Drive2 is a virtual drive. It will be removed after rebooting the
Windows 2000 or Windows NT machine.
Step 4
Open <drive2:>.
Step 5
If Autoplay is enabled, the autorun.bat file will automatically run. If it does not,
double-click it. A browser window opens, displaying the Appliance Update
screen.
Step 6
Enter the hostname or IP address of the appliance.
The remote repository is now on the Windows NT or Windows 2000 server. To
install software updates from this repository, see Installing Software Updates,
page 5-41.
Related Topic
Creating a Local Repository, page 5-39
Installing Software Updates
Note
When you update or reinstall software, the Wireless LAN Solution Engine
stops and restarts. Therefore, you cannot access the Wireless LAN Solution
Engine during a software update, and you must log in again after updating
software.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
5-41
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Managing the Appliance
Procedure
Step 1
Select Administration > Appliance > Software > Install Software Updates.
The Install Software Updates window opens and displays information about the
Wireless LAN Solution Engine, the currently defined repository, and the
compatible software available for updating.
Step 2
Select a software version from the Compatible Updates table, Compatible
Reinstallations table, or Complete Images table.
These tables display the following information about the software you can install.
Field
Description
Name
Software identifier.
Version
Version number of the software.
Summary
Brief description of the software.
Release Date
Release date of the software.
Details
Detailed description of the software.
Step 3
To view details about any of the listed software, click README in the Details
field.
Step 4
To begin the installation, make a selection from the Compatible Updates table,
Compatible Reinstallations table, or Complete Images table.
Step 5
To install the selected software, click Install. The Install Software Updates
window opens.
Step 6
Click Confirm to continue the installation. Click Cancel to cancel the
installation.
When the installation is complete, the WLSE will be unavailable for a few
minutes while it restarts. The Login screen will appear when the update is
complete.
You can view details of the installation after the installation is complete
(Software > Status > View Log).
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
5-42
78-14092-01
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Managing the Appliance
Related Topics
•
Defining the Repository, page 5-38
•
Viewing Software Status, page 5-37
•
Viewing Software Update History, page 5-44
•
Browsing the Repository, page 5-43
•
Managing the Software, page 5-37
Browsing the Repository
You can browse the available complete images and software upgrades on the
repository using this option.
Note
A repository must be defined in order to browse software. To define the
repository, see Defining the Repository, page 5-38.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Administration > Appliance > Software > Browse Repository. The
Browse Repository dialog box appears.
Step 2
To view detailed information about a complete image or update, click README
in the Complete Images table or Updates table. These tables display the following
about all the software available on the repository:
Field
Description
Name
Software identifier.
Version
Version number of the software.
Appliance Type
The appliance type that the software is designed for.
Release Date
Release date of the software.
Summary
Brief description of the software.
Details
Detailed description of the software. Click README to display details.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
5-43
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Managing the Appliance
Related Topics
•
Installing Software Updates, page 5-41
•
Managing the Software, page 5-37
Viewing Software Update History
This window shows only the update history, not a history of installed images. If
you install a complete new image, the previous update history will be erased.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Administration > Appliance > Software > Software Update History.
The Software Update History window displays the following:
Field
Description
Name
Software identifier.
Version
Software version.
Summary
Summary of the installed software.
Install Date
The date and time (UTC) the software was installed.
Status
The status of the installed software.
Details
The detailed install log for this software.
Status
The status of the installation:
Success—Software was installed with no errors.
Warning—Software installed successfully with minor errors.
Error—Software installation was unsuccessful.
Details
Step 2
The detailed install log for this installation, including warning
and error messages.
Click View Log in the Details field to view the detailed install log for a software
installation.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
5-44
78-14092-01
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Managing the Appliance
Related Topics
•
Viewing Software Status, page 5-37
•
Browsing the Repository, page 5-43
•
Managing the Software, page 5-37
Overview: Security
The WLSE provides the following security features:
•
Optional secure connection through a Web browser
•
Connection through the CLI via Telnet
•
Secure connection through the CLI via SSH
•
Authentication through the local database or through alternative
authentication services
•
Flexible user access to managed devices and Wireless LAN Solution Engine
services through configurable roles.
You can manage your system’s security by:
•
Selecting an Authentication Module, page 5-47
•
Disabling or Enabling Telnet and Selecting SSH, page 5-49
•
Viewing the Last 10 Logged-On Users, page 5-49
•
Managing Roles, page 5-60
Managing Security
The Security options include:
•
Authentication Modules—Choose the authentication module used (see
Overview: Authentication Modules, page 5-46).
•
SSL (HTTPS)—Obtain a permanent, signed Certificate Signed Request (see
Managing SSL (HTTPS), page 5-48).
•
Telnet and SSH—Configure Telnet and SSH settings (see Disabling or
Enabling Telnet and Selecting SSH, page 5-49).
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
5-45
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Managing the Appliance
•
Last 10 Logins—View information about the last 10 users who have logged
on to the WLSE (see Viewing the Last 10 Logged-On Users, page 5-49).
Overview: Authentication Modules
The Wireless LAN Solution Engine provides a mechanism for authenticating
users through the local authentication module and a local database of user IDs and
passwords. Many network managers, however, already have an authentication
service. To use your own authentication service instead of the local module, you
can select one of the alternative modules:
•
TACACS+
•
Radius
•
MS NT Domain
After you select and configure a module, all authentication transactions are
performed by the authentication service associated with that module. Users log in
with the user ID and password associated with the current authentication module.
The Wireless LAN Solution Engine determines user roles; therefore, all users
must be in the local database of user IDs and passwords. A user’s role determines
the services and devices that the user can access. Users must have the same user
ID locally as they have in the alternative authentication source, but the local
password and authentication service password do not have to be same.
Users who are authenticated by an alternative service and who are not in the local
database have no roles assigned to them. Users who have no roles see only the
splash screen after logging in and cannot view screens or perform tasks.
If the alternative authentication service fails, the Wireless LAN Solution Engine
defaults to the Local authentication module. Even if the local user database fails,
you can always log in as the admin user.
Related Topics
•
Selecting an Authentication Module, page 5-47
•
Administering Users, page 5-60
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
5-46
78-14092-01
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Managing the Appliance
Selecting an Authentication Module
The Local login module is selected by default, but you can select a different
module.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Administration > Appliance > Security > Authentication Modules. The
Authentication Modules dialog box appears.
Step 2
Select an authentication module from the Select Module drop down list, then click
Submit. A Configuration dialog box appears for all selections except the Local
module.
Step 3
Depending on the authentication module you selected, enter the following data,
then click Submit:.
•
Radius module or TACACS+ module:
– Primary Server and Secondary Server—IP addresses or DNS names of
the primary and secondary authentication servers. A secondary server is
optional.
– Shared Secret—Secret key.
•
MS NT Domain module:
– Domain—Name of the Windows domain.
– Primary Domain Controller and Backup Domain Controller—Names of
the primary and backup Windows domain controllers. A backup domain
controller is optional.
After you change the authentication module, you do not have to restart the
Wireless LAN Solution Engine. Changing the module does not affect users who
are currently logged on. Users who log on after the change use the new module.
Related Topic
Overview: Security, page 5-45
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
5-47
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Managing the Appliance
Managing SSL (HTTPS)
SSL (secure socket layer) protocol provides a secure connection between Web
clients and the Wireless LAN Solution Engine. When you initially set up the
Wireless LAN Solution Engine, an unsigned certificate and a CSR (Certificate
Signed Request) are automatically generated and SSL is enabled. The unsigned
certificate expires in one year. To obtain a permanent, signed certificate, use the
following procedure.
Note
To establish a connection to the Wireless LAN Solution Engine using SSL, use
the prefix https instead of http when entering the URL into the browser and do
not append a port number to the URL.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Administration > Appliance > Security > SSL (HTTPS). The SSL
(HTTPS) dialog box appears.
Step 2
Click View CSR. The encrypted CSR is displayed.
Step 3
Copy the encrypted CSR (between the begin and end lines). Send the CSR to a
certificate authority (such as Verisign), following the authority’s procedure.
Step 4
When you receive the signed certificate:
a.
Copy it into an ASCII file on a client system.
b.
On the same client, select Administration > Security.
c.
Under SSL (HTTPS), type the path to the signed certificate or click Browse
to locate the file, then click Submit Certificate.
d.
To use the new certificate, you need to restart the Wireless LAN Solution
Engine by logging on through the CLI, running the services stop command
to stop the system, then running the services start command to restart the
system.
Related Topic
Overview: Security, page 5-45
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
5-48
78-14092-01
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Managing the Appliance
Disabling or Enabling Telnet and Selecting SSH
Telnet is used for connecting to the Wireless LAN Solution Engine through the
CLI. By default, Telnet is enabled. To prevent unsecure connections through the
CLI, you can disable Telnet.
SSH provides a secure Telnet connection, encrypting all traffic, including
passwords. By default, both SSH1 and SSH2 are used.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Administration > Appliance > Security > SSH and Telnet. The SSH and
Telnet control panel appears.
Step 2
To change the type of SSH used, select the desired SSH version from Select
Protocol, then click Change Protocol.
Step 3
To enable or disable Telnet, make a selection from Telnet, then click Configure.
Changes takes place immediately.
Related Topic
Overview: Security, page 5-45
Viewing the Last 10 Logged-On Users
You can view information about the last 10 users who have logged on to
the WLSE.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Administration > Appliance > Security > Last 10 Logins.
The Last 10 Logins table appears, showing the following information for the last
10 logins.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
5-49
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Managing the Appliance
Field
Description
Login Name
User’s login name.
Logged In Since
Date and time the user logged in (GMT).
IP Address
IP address of the system from which the user
logged in.
Associated role
Role assigned to the user.
Related Topic
Overview: Security, page 5-45
Backing Up and Restoring Data
The Backup and Restore options include:
•
Backup—Back up data, including all Wireless LAN Solution Engine role and
user information (see Backing Up Data, page 5-51).
•
Restore—Restore an available backup image (see Restoring Data,
page 5-52).
•
Configure—Set the backup location (see Configuring the Backup Location,
page 5-50).
Configuring the Backup Location
The backup location should be running an FTP server, because the Wireless LAN
Solution Engine pushes the backed-up data to the FTP server.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Administration > Appliance > Backup and Restore > Configure.
Step 2
Enter the hostname/IP for the backup location.
Step 3
Enter the username you use on the backup location machine.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
5-50
78-14092-01
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Managing the Appliance
Step 4
Enter the password you use on the backup location machine.
Step 5
Reenter the password to verify that it is correct.
Step 6
Optional—Specify the path to which the backup image is saved.
Step 7
Click Save.
Related Topics
•
Backing Up Data, page 5-51
•
Restoring Data, page 5-52
Backing Up Data
Data backed up includes Wireless LAN Solution Engine role and user
information, seed and discovery (see Managing Device Discovery, page 5-2)
configuration information, and customized view information.
Note
You should perform a backup every time you add a user, or whenever user
views have changed.
Procedure
Step 1
Configure the backup location (see Configuring the Backup Location, page 5-50).
Step 2
Select Administration > Appliance > Backup and Restore > Backup.
Step 3
Click Backup.
The WLSE saves the backup image.
Step 4
To confirm that your data has been backed up, look at your backup location for a
backup directory with saved <WLSE hostname_date_time.inf and <WLSE
hostname_date_time.tar files.
Related Topic
Restoring Data, page 5-52
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
5-51
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Managing the Appliance
Restoring Data
Procedure
Step 1
Select Administration > Appliance > Backup and Restore > Restore.
Step 2
From the Available Images list, select a backup image. Images are listed by
Wireless LAN Solution Engine hostname and date and time of backup.
Step 3
Click Restore. The Restore Backup window opens.
Step 4
Click OK.
The Wireless LAN Solution Engine shuts down and restarts while data is being
restored.
Related Topics
•
Backing Up Data, page 5-51
•
Configuring the Backup Location, page 5-50
Using Diagnostics
The Diagnostics options are:
•
WLSE Info—Gather troubleshooting information about the WLSE status
and create status reports (see Viewing and Creating a Status Report,
page 5-53).
•
Self Test—Create and display self tests (see Viewing and Creating a Self-Test
Report, page 5-53).
•
Processes—View WLSE processes status, stop and start processes (see
Viewing Processes, page 5-54).
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
5-52
78-14092-01
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Managing the Appliance
Viewing and Creating a Status Report
You can gather troubleshooting information about the status of the Wireless LAN
Solution Engine using this option.
Status reports show information about the product database status, product
process status, log files, and so on.
Note
Status reports reflect the UTC time.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Administration > Appliance > Diagnostics > WLSE Info. The WLSE
Information and Status Report dialog box appears.
Step 2
To display a report, click its name. If there are no reports listed, you must create
a new report by clicking Create.
Step 3
To create a new report, click Create. It will take five to seven minutes for the
report to be complete. To display the new report, click its name. If the new report
is not listed, click Refresh.
Step 4
To delete a report, click the report check box, then click Delete.
Related Topics
•
Viewing and Creating a Self-Test Report, page 5-53
•
Viewing Processes, page 5-54
Viewing and Creating a Self-Test Report
Self-tests include memory, database, DNS setup, and backup location
configuration tests. Self-test reports indicate whether the tests passed or failed.
Note
Self-test reports reflect UTC time.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
5-53
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Managing the Appliance
Procedure
Step 1
Select Administration > Appliance > Diagnostics > Self Test. The WLSE
Self-Test Report dialog box appears.
Step 2
To display a report, click its name. If there are no reports listed, you must create
a new report by clicking Create.
Step 3
To display the new report, click its name. If the report is not displayed, click
Refresh.
Step 4
To delete a report, select the report check box, then click Delete.
Related Topics
•
Viewing and Creating a Status Report, page 5-53
•
Viewing Processes, page 5-54
Viewing Processes
You can view the status of the major processes running on the Wireless LAN
Solution Engine using this option. You can also start and stop processes and
access complete reports.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Administration > Appliance > Diagnostics > Processes. The Process
Report displays the following:
Column
Description
Process name
Describes how a process is registered.
State
Process status and a summary of the log file entries for
the process.
Pid
Process ID. A unique number by which the operating
system identifies each running program.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
5-54
78-14092-01
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Managing the Appliance
Column
Description
RC
Return code. “0” represents normal program operation.
Any other number typically represents an error. Refer to
the error log.
Signo
Signal number. “0” represents normal program
operation. Any other number is the last signal delivered
to the program before it terminated.
Start Time
Time (UTC) and date the process was started.
Stop Time
Time (UTC) and date the process was stopped.
Core
The entry “Not applicable” means the program is running
normally.
The entry “Core file created” means the program is not
running normally and the operating system has created a
file called a core file. The core file stores important data
about processes.
Information
Step 2
The entry indicates what the process is doing. “Not
applicable” means the program is not running normally.
Perform any or all of these tasks:
•
To view details, click any process name. The Daemon Information window
opens.
•
To view process status, click any process state. The System Log window
opens.
•
To stop a process, select the check box next to the process name and click
Stop. The Process Status table displays the new status and other process
information. The WebServer and Tomcat processes cannot be stopped.
•
To start a stopped process, select the check box next to that process name and
click Start. The Process Status table displays the new status and other process
information.
•
To update the Process Status table with the latest data, click Refresh. The
table does not automatically update.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
5-55
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Managing the Appliance
•
To see a complete report of all processes running on the WLSE, click
Complete Report.
Processes Displayed
The Process Status table displays the status of the following major WLSE-specific
processes:
Process Name
Description
WLSEjobvm
The job virtual machine.
WLSEFaults
The fault manager.
WebServer
The Web Server.
Tomcat
The Java servlet engine.
ExcepReporter
The process that forwards traps.
CDPbrdcast
The CDP daemon that identifies Cisco devices to their
immediate neighbors.
PerfMon
The process that monitors performance.
Daemon Information
The Daemon Information dialog box displays the following:
Field
Description
Process
The process name.
Path
The file location.
Flags
The flags used to register the process with the Daemon
Manager.
Startup
The method used to start the process.
Dependencies
The other processes that must be running for this process to
run.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
5-56
78-14092-01
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Managing the Appliance
System Log
The system log, which describes the status of the processes running in the system,
displays the following:
Field
Description
Timestamp
The date and time the message is logged.
Process
The process that logged the message.
Type
The message type, such as INFO, WARNING, CRITICAL.
Information
The process status as known by the Daemon Manager.
Setting Up the Splash Screen Message
The Splash Screen Message window allows you to set up a message that is
displayed when a user logs in. After viewing the message, the user must click
Agree to continue logging in, or click Disagree to log out.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Administration > Appliance > Splash Screen. The Splash Screen
Message window appears.
Step 2
Enter the message to be displayed.
Step 3
Check the Enable check box, then click Apply. The splash screen message is
enabled.
Note
You must check Enable for the message to appear.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
5-57
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Managing System Parameters
Managing System Parameters
The System Parameters window allows you to set global parameters. For example,
to set the interval at which the Wireless Clients reports will be updated, change
the Wireless Client Polling Interval parameters.
Note
Your login determines whether you can use this option.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Administration > System Parameters. The following parameters are
displayed in the System Parameters window:
Parameter
Description
Inventory Polling Interval
Interval at which the configuration data will be collected from the
devices. (This is the data shown in any GUI device detail table.)
Tip
For more accurate trending, set this parameter at a lower
interval than Inventory Performance Attributes Polling
Interval.
Default: 1 hour
Inventory Performance
Attributes Polling Interval
Interval at which the performance and utilization data will be
collected from the devices.
To set the aggregation period of this data, change the Aggregation
Interval parameter.
Default: 5 minutes
Wireless Client Polling Interval
Interval at which the device data is collected for client information
and the Wireless Clients reports are updated.
Default: 5 minutes
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
5-58
78-14092-01
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Managing System Parameters
Parameter
Description
Aggregation Interval
Interval at which the performance data (from Inventory
Performance Attributes Polling Interval) is aggregated. (This is the
data shown in Report Trends.)
Note
For reports it is necessary to compute some attributes
over longer periods (average, percentages, changes).
This interval determines how often these computations
are performed.
Default: 3 hours
Short Term Trending Inventory
Truncation Interval
Duration for which the performance data (from Inventory
Performance Attributes Polling Interval) is retained by the WLSE.
Default: 1 day
Aggregation Truncation Interval Duration for which the aggregated (historical) data is retained by
the WLSE.
Default: 15 days
Fault History Truncation Interval Duration for which the fault data is retained. (This is the data shown
in Fault Description.)
Default: 30 days
Job History Truncation Interval
Duration for which job data is retained. (This is the data shown in
Configure Jobs, Discovery History, Email Jobs.)
Note
Recurring jobs are truncated every day to retain the last
30 runs.
Default: 30 days
Step 2
To change any of the parameters, select new values from the pulldown lists and
click Apply to save the changes. To reset the system parameters to the previous
values, click Reset.
Note
To reset the parameters to previous values, click Reset before saving.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
5-59
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Administering Users
A confirmation dialog appears. To return to the System Parameters window, click
Back.
Administering Users
The User Admin options allow you to manage user roles and logins:
•
Manage Roles—Add, modify, and delete roles (see Managing Roles,
page 5-60).
•
Manage Users—Add, modify, and delete user accounts (see Managing
Users, page 5-62).
Related Topic
Modifying Your Profile, page 5-65
Managing Roles
Use this option to add, modify, and delete user-defined roles and to modify
predefined roles. A user’s role determines the tabs and subtabs the user can access.
Users who have access to a subtab can perform all of the tasks under the subtab.
Although you cannot delete predefined roles, you can modify them. The
predefined roles and their default privileges are:
•
System administrator—Superuser access to the Wireless LAN Solution
Engine (can perform any task). The password is the password assigned during
initial WLSE setup (using the console). You can change the password using
the console or the WLSE’s Manage Users option (see Managing Users,
page 5-62).
•
Network administrator—Monitoring authority, device configuration
authority, and discovery configuration authority.
•
Network operator—Monitoring and device configuration authority.
•
Help desk—Monitoring authority only.
You can create other roles, which can be modified or deleted.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
5-60
78-14092-01
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Administering Users
Note
Your login determines whether you can use this option.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To access the role management window, select Administration > User Admin >
Manage Roles. Role names are displayed in the center pane. To view the subtabs
to which the role has access, select the role.
•
The admin user can view all existing roles.
•
Other users can only view the roles assigned to them and any roles that they
have created.
To add a role:
a.
Replace the text New Role with the name you have chosen for the new role.
b.
Select the check boxes next to the features the role will access. Click Add.
Note
c.
When you select a feature (for example, Display Faults), the role
is granted access to the corresponding subtab (for example,
Faults > Display Faults).
The new role appears in the list of roles in the middle pane.
Step 3
To modify a role, select the role. Select the check boxes for the features you want
to add to the role and deselect the check boxes next to the features you want to
remove from the role. Then click Modify to save the changes.
Step 4
To delete a user-defined role, select the role, then click Delete.
Related Topics
•
Naming Guidelines, page A-1
•
Managing Users, page 5-62
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
5-61
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Administering Users
Managing Users
Use this option to:
•
Add Users, page 5-62
•
Modify Users, page 5-63
•
Delete Users, page 5-65
Add Users
Note
Your login determines whether you can use this option.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Select Administration > User Admin > Manage Users. The Add/Modify/Delete
dialog appears. The Users list displays the current users.
•
The admin user can view and modify all existing users.
•
Other users can view their own logins and any users they have created.
Enter the following information, in the order shown:
Note
To clear your entries and start over, click Clear.
Field
Information to Enter
User Name
Enter the name of the new user.
User Password
Enter a password for new user.
Confirm Password Reenter the password.
Email
Enter the email address of the user (optional).
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
5-62
78-14092-01
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Administering Users
Step 3
Field
Information to Enter
CLI Access
Select the user’s access to the WLSE CLI: None, Level 0,
or Level 15. By default, Level 15 is selected for System
Administrator, and None is selected for other users. Users
with privilege level 15 can use all commands, and users
with privilege level 0 can use a subset.
Roles
Select one or more roles for the user. To add a role, select
it from the pulldown list. To view a role, select it and click
show role. To remove a role, select it and click remove.
To add the new user, click Add. The new username appears in the Users list. To
discard your changes, click Clear.
Modify Users
Note
Your login determines whether you can use these options.
Procedure
To modify a user:
Step 1
Select Administration > User Admin > Add/Modify/Delete. The
Add/Modify/Delete dialog appears. The Users list displays the current users.
Note
Only the logins created by you are displayed. If logins were created by
another user, they are not visible; only their creator can display them.
The admin user can view all logins.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
5-63
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Administering Users
Step 2
Step 3
Select the user from the Users list and make the desired changes:
Field
Information to Enter
User Name
Enter the user’s name.
User Password
Enter a new password for new user.
Confirm Password
Reenter the new password.
Email
Enter or change the user’s email address.
CLI Access
Change the user’s access to the WLSE CLI: None, Level
0, or Level 15. By default, Level 15 is selected for
System Administrator, and None is selected for others.
Users with privilege level 15 can use all commands, and
users with privilege level 0 can use a subset. For
information on commands available for each privilege
level, see the User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105
Wireless LAN Solution Engine—From the online help,
click View PDF.
Roles
Change the user’s roles. To add a role, select it from the
pulldown list. To view a role, select it and click show
role. To remove a role, select it and click remove.
Click Modify to save your changes or Clear to discard your changes.
Related Topics
•
Naming Guidelines, page A-1
•
Managing Roles, page 5-60
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
5-64
78-14092-01
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Modifying Your Profile
Delete Users
Note
Your login determines whether you can use this option.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Administration > User Admin > Manage Users. The Manage Users
dialog appears.
Step 2
Select the username from the Users list, then click Delete. A confirmation dialog
appears. After you click OK, the user is deleted.
Modifying Your Profile
Use the My Profile tab to change your password.
Note
Your login determines whether you can use this option.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Administration > My Profile > Change password.
Step 2
To change your password, enter a new password in the New Password and
Re-enter New Password fields. For information on allowable characters, see
Naming Guidelines, page A-1.
Step 3
Click Apply to save your changes or Reset to discard your changes.
Related Topic
•
Modify Users, page 5-63
•
Naming Guidelines, page A-1
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
5-65
Chapter 5
Performing Administrative Tasks
Using Connectivity Tools
Using Connectivity Tools
The options in the Connectivity Tools window allow you to perform connectivity
tests and find information about devices.
Note
Your login determines whether you can use this option.
Procedure
Step 1
Select Administration > Connectivity Tools. The Network Connectivity and
Security Test dialog box appears.
Step 2
Enter a device name or IP address in the Device text box.
Step 3
Click an option button:
Note
Pressing Enter will not work. You must click a button.
•
Ping—Test device reachability.
•
Traceroute—Detect routing errors between the Wireless LAN Solution
Engine and the target device.
•
NSLookup—Look up device or host information via the name server. The
information displayed includes server name, server IP address, device name,
and the device IP address.
•
TCP Port Scan—Find the active ports on the device.
A results window appears.
Step 4
Click Close to close the results window.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
5-66
78-14092-01
C H A P T E R
6
Frequently Asked Questions
Q. What ports and protocols does the WLSE use?
A. For discovery and fault monitoring, the WLSE primarily uses SNMP (UDP
port 161). For applying configuration changes, the WLSE uses SNMP, HTTP
(TCP port 80 or as configured), and TFTP (UDP port 69).
Q. How do configuration files get transferred to access points?
A. Even though access points support both TFTP and FTP, the WLSE uses only
TFTP to upload and download configuration files.
Q. Can you undo a configuration update?
A. Yes, but only after a successful configuration update has taken place.
Q. Is Telnet enabled or disabled by default on the WLSE?
A. Telnet is disabled by default for security reasons.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
6-1
Chapter 6
Frequently Asked Questions
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
6-2
78-14092-01
C H A P T E R
7
Troubleshooting
This section provides suggestions for troubleshooting the Wireless LAN Solution
Engine components. If the suggestions do not resolve the error, check the release
notes for a possible work around, or contact the Cisco TAC or your customer
support.
This section includes troubleshooting suggestions for the following:
•
Faults, page 7-2
•
Configure, page 7-2
•
Reports, page 7-7
•
Administration, page 7-9
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
7-1
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Faults
Feature
Symptom
Probable Cause
Possible Solution
Faults > Display
Faults
The Display Fault
view is blank.
There are no faults to
report based on the
filtering criteria you
entered.
Not applicable.
Faults > Fault
Forwarding
Email fails to arrive The SMTP server is not
at destination.
configured properly.
Configure the SMTP server
using the mailroute
command.
For information on the
mailroute command, select
Help > View PDF, then select
the Command Reference
appendix.
Configure
Feature
Symptom
Probable Cause
Possible Solution
Configure >
Templates
The access point is
inaccessible
through the HTTP
port set through
template
configuration job.
The HTTP port setting
does not take effect until
the access point is cold
rebooted.
Cold reboot the access point.
Template
configuration job
fails every time.
The access point is not set Make sure the WLSE is
up properly.
configured as a TFTP server
for the access point.
For additional information,
see Getting Started,
page 1-3.
Configure > Jobs
The Undo function
does not work.
Your job is SNMP-based, None.
which is not supported by
the Undo function.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
7-2
78-14092-01
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Feature
Symptom
Probable Cause
Possible Solution
Configure > Jobs
The Undo function
does not work.
Your job includes the
following Security
options, which are not
supported by the Undo
function:
None.
•
Local Admin
Authentication under
the Local Admin
Access
•
Encryption Key
Values under Local
AP/Client Security
•
Shared Secret under
Server-Based
Security.
•
Shared Secret under
Accounting.
Your job includes the
FTP Username and
password.
None.
You are trying to Undo a
job that has already been
undone.
None.
Your job is HTTP-based
but you have not set up
the HTTP credentials.
Add HTTP credentials using
Administration >Discover
>Device Credentials >
HTTP User/Password
You are trying to Undo a
job that contains Custom
values, which are not
supported by the Undo
function.
None.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
7-3
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Feature
Symptom
Probable Cause
Possible Solution
Configure > Jobs
HTTP job does not
run or fails.
The credentials are not set Make sure the credentials on
properly.
the WLSE are the same as
the credentials on the access
point or bridge using
Administration > Discover
> Device Credentials.
Make sure the credentials on
the access point or bridge
have firmware rights.
The TFTP server is not
set up correctly.
The TFTP setting on the
access point should point to
the WLSE as its TFTP
server. This can be done by
applying a template
configuration, containing
TFTP server settings,
through an SNMP job (only
11.08T and higher)
HTTP browsing is
The device is not
responding to HTTP disabled on the AP
jobs.
because of this job run.
At the access point console,
turn on non-console
browsing, or schedule an
SNMP job for the device if
its version is11.08T or
higher.
SNMP job does not
run or fails.
Make sure the SNMP
community string set on the
WLSE is the same as the
string set on the access point
or bridge using
Administration > Discover
> Device Credentials.
The community string is
not set properly.
Make sure the SNMP
community string on the
access point or bridge has
firmware rights.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
7-4
78-14092-01
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Feature
Symptom
Probable Cause
Possible Solution
Configure > Jobs
The job failed.
There are multiple
reasons a job may have
failed.
Make sure all the
bootstrapping steps have
been performed correctly on
the access point.
Check the jobvm.log by
selecting Administration >
Appliance > Status > View
Log File to further identify
and report the problem.
If after applying a
configuration template on
a device, the device
reboots, the job will be
categorized as Failed.
Check if “Verification could
not be completed” appears
in the Job Run Detail > Job
Run Log to identify this
problem.
When applying a
configuration template on
a job with multiple
devices, if the job fails on
even one of the devices,
the job is categorized as
Failed.
The job is reported The SNMP timeout to the
device is too short.
as failed, but the
configuration was
applied successfully
to the devices.
Select Administration >
Discover > Device
Credentials > SNMP
Communities and increase
the SNMP timeout.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
7-5
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Feature
Symptom
Probable Cause
Possible Solution
Configure > Jobs
The job completed
with errors.
This error can be seen in
jobs where pre- or postconfiguration backups
before or after applying
the new configuration
fail, but the new
configuration is applied
successfully.
Check if “Completed with
errors” appears in the Job
Run Detail > Job Run Log
to identify this problem.
There is a time
discrepancy in
scheduled jobs.
The time is not set
correctly on the WLSE.
Using CLI commands, reset
the time to Universal
Coordinated Time (UTC) as
follows:
1.
Enter services stop to
stop services.
2.
Enter the clock
command to reset the
time.
3.
Enter services start to
restart the services.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
7-6
78-14092-01
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Reports
Feature
Symptom
Probable Cause
Possible Solution
Reports
After running a job,
the updated data
does not appear in a
report.
A full polling cycle has
not completed and the
new data has not been
entered in the database.
Verify that the polling cycle has
completed as follows:
Reports >
Scheduled Email
Jobs
Email fails to
arrive at its
destination.
The SMTP server is not
configured properly.
There is a time
discrepancy in the
scheduled email
jobs.
The time is not set
correctly on the WLSE.
1.
Select Administration >
Appliance > Status > View
Log File.
2.
Click jobvm.log.
3.
Scroll through the log to
find the message: “Finished
Inventory” for your
particular job.
Configure the SMTP server
using the mailroute command.
For information on the mailroute
command, select Help > View
PDF, then, click Command
Reference in the table of
contents.
Using CLI commands, reset the
time to Universal Coordinated
Time (UTC) as follows:
1.
Enter services stop to stop
services.
2.
Enter the clock command to
reset the time.
3.
Enter services start to
restart the services.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
7-7
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Feature
Symptom
Probable Cause
Possible Solution
Reports >
Wireless Clients
The access point
data in the
Historical
Associations report
is not accurate.
The wireless client was
associated with an
access point managed by
the WLSE, but it
subsequently associated
with an access point that
was added to the
network, but not yet
managed by the WLSE.
Verify that the associated access
points are in the managed
devices folder by selecting
Administration > Discover >
Managed Devices >
Manage/Unmanage.
Reports > Current The report for
> Summary
access points is
Reports > Current empty.
The SNMP user may not Open a browser window to the
have the correct rights
access point, and select Setup >
assigned.
Security > User Information.
> Detailed
Make sure that the user
corresponding to the SNMP
community (which is set up in
WLSE in Discovery > Device
Credentials) has been granted
rights for the following: Ident,
firmware, admin, snmp, and
write.
If not, click on the user and
assign all these rights.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
7-8
78-14092-01
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Administration
Feature
Symptom
Probable Cause
The devices have not
Administration >
Devices were
Discover > Managed discovered but are been moved to the
Devices
not displayed in the Managed state.
GUI; for example,
in reports.
Administration >
Discover > Discover
Administration >
User Admin >
Manage Users
There is a time
discrepancy in the
scheduled
discovery jobs.
The time is not set
correctly on the WLSE.
Possible Solution
Select Administration >
Discover > Managed
Devices. Move the devices
from New or Unmanaged to
Managed. See Manage
Devices, page 5-13.
Using CLI commands, reset
the time to Universal
Coordinated Time (UTC) as
follows:
1.
Enter services stop to
stop services.
2.
Enter the clock
command to reset the
time.
3.
Enter services start to
restart the services.
None. For more information,
Users are not
Only the user who
visible in the list of created a given user can see Managing Users,
users.
view that user’s name in page 5-62.
the list of users, although
the admin user can view
all users.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
7-9
Chapter 7
Feature
Symptom
Administration >
Devices were not
Discover > Managed discovered.
Devices
Troubleshooting
Probable Cause
Possible Solution
The device is not
specified as a seed and
the CDP distance is not
high enough to reach the
device.
Select Administration >
Discover > Discover >
Modify Discovery Settings.
Specify the device as a seed
or increase the CDP distance.
See Add Seed Devices and
Schedule Discovery,
page 5-10.
CDP is not enabled on the For more information about
device.
device setup, see Set Up
Devices, page 5-4. If you are
not using CDP, you can
import devices from a file or
from CiscoWorks2000; see
Importing Devices,
page 5-21.
A switch is not
discovered unless it has
an access point attached
to it. Discovery can
proceed beyond the
switch, but the switch
itself is not discovered.
Make sure a properly
configured access point is
attached to the switch. See
Set Up Devices, page 5-4.
SNMP is not enabled on
the device or SNMP
community strings are
not entered on the WLSE.
SNMP must be enabled on
the device and credentials
must be entered on the
WLSE. See Set Up Devices,
page 5-4 or Setting Device
Credentials, page 5-17.
The SNMP timeouts or
retries are set too low.
Reset the timeouts and
retries. See Setting Device
Credentials, page 5-17.
The device is down.
None.
The device is not
supported.
None.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
7-10
78-14092-01
A P P E N D I X
A
Naming Guidelines
•
Names and Descriptions—allowable characters for names and descriptions
(see Name and Description Allowable Characters, page A-1).
•
Roles and Users—rules to follow when creating new roles and users (see
Roles and User Rules, page A-2).
Name and Description Allowable Characters
Names—no more than 64 characters allowed
Descriptions—no more than 256 characters allowed
Character Description
Example
alphanumeric—upper and lower case
a123b, A123B
space
exclamation mark
!
number sign
#
percent sign
%
ampersand
&
left and right parenthesis
()
asterisk
*
plus sign
+
comma
,
hyphen, dash, minus
-
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
A-1
Appendix A
Naming Guidelines
Character Description
Example
full stop (period)
.
solidus (forward slash)
/
colon
:
semicolon
;
less-than and greater-than signs
<>
equals
=
question mark
?
low line (underscore)
_
left and right square bracket
[]
reverse solidus (backward slash)
\
left and right curly bracket
{}
vertical line
|
tilde
~
dollar sign
$
Roles and User Rules
Type
User Name
User Password
Role
Rules
•
No more than 32 characters.
•
Case-sensitive.
•
Any character from the table above.
•
5-8 characters.
•
Case-sensitive.
•
Any alphanumeric character and an underscore.
•
No more than 32 characters.
•
Case-sensitive.
•
Any character from the table above.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
A-2
78-14092-01
A P P E N D I X
B
Command Reference
This appendix summarizes the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s command line
interface (CLI) commands. When you make a configuration change using these
commands, the system configuration is updated immediately.
This appendix contains the following sections:
•
Using the CLI, page B-2
•
CLI Conventions, page B-2
•
Command Privileges, page B-2
•
Checking Command Syntax, page B-2
•
Command History Feature, page B-3
•
Help for CLI Commands, page B-3
•
Command Summary, page B-4
•
Command Description Conventions, page B-9
•
Privilege Level 0 Commands, page B-10
•
Privilege Level 15 Commands, page B-16
•
Maintenance Image Commands, page B-75
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
B-1
Appendix B
Command Reference
Using the CLI
Using the CLI
You can use the CLI by:
•
Attaching a console to the WLSE
•
Accessing the WLSE using Telnet
CLI Conventions
The command-line interface (CLI) uses the following conventions:
•
The key combination ^c or Ctrl-c means hold down the Ctrl key while you
press the c key.
•
A string is defined as a nonquoted set of characters.
Do not confuse the WLSE’s CLI with the IOS CLI. Though they are similar, they
are not identical.
Command Privileges
Access to CLI commands is controlled by your user account privilege level. Users
with privilege level 15 can use all commands. Users with privilege level 0 can use
only a subset of the commands. The command descriptions in this appendix are
organized by privilege level. For more information about user accounts and
privileges, refer to Administering Users, page 5-60.
Checking Command Syntax
The user interface provides several types of responses to incorrect command
entries:
•
If you enter a command line that does not contain any valid commands, the
system displays Command not found.
•
If you enter a valid command but omit required options, the system displays
Incomplete command.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
B-2
78-14092-01
Appendix B
Command Reference
Command History Feature
•
If you enter a valid command but provide invalid options or parameters, the
system displays Invalid input.
In addition, some commands have command-specific error messages that notify
you that a command is valid, but that it cannot run correctly.
Command History Feature
The CLI provides a command history feature. To display previously entered
commands, press the up arrow key. After pressing the up arrow key, you can press
the down arrow key to display the commands in reverse order. To run a command,
press the Enter key while the command is displayed on the command line. You
can also edit commands before pressing the Enter key.
Help for CLI Commands
You can obtain help using the following methods:
•
For a list of all commands and their syntax, type help and press Enter.
•
For help on a specific command, use either of the following methods:
– Type the command name, a space, help; then press Enter. For example,
ntp help.
– Type help, a space, and the command name; then press Enter. For
example, help ntp.
The help contains command usage information and syntax.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
B-3
Appendix B
Command Reference
Command Summary
Command Summary
Table B-1 summarizes all commands available on the WLSE. Refer to the full
description of commands that you are not familiar with before using them.
Table B-1
Command Summary
Command
Privilege
Level
Summary Description
Location of Full Description
auth
15
Enables secure remote authentication.
“auth” section on page B-16
backup
15
Backs up the WLSE.
“backup” section on
page B-17
backupconfig
15
Sets the configuration for all backup and “backupconfig” section on
restore operations.
page B-18
cdp
15
Configures the Cisco Discovery Protocol “cdp” section on page B-19
(CDP).
clock
15
Sets the WLSE’s date and time.
“clock” section on page B-20
df
15
Display the current storage usage on the
WLSE.
“df” section on page B-22
erase config
151
Erases the configuration in Flash memory “erase config” section on
and reload the device.
page B-22
exit
0
Logs user out of the WLSE.
“exit” section on page B-10
Displays IP address of a known domain
name.
“gethostbyname” section on
page B-24
Checks and repairs the filesystem.
“fsck” section on page B-76
Implements port filtering on the WLSE.
“firewall” section on
page B-23
gethostbyname 15
fsck
N/A2
firewall
hostname
15
Changes the system hostname.
“hostname” section on
page B-25
import
15
Imports host files, or to maps IP
addresses to hostnames.
“import” section on page B-25
install
configure
15
Configures the repository that the
Wireless LAN Solution Engine uses to
install updates.
“install configure” section on
page B-27
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
B-4
78-14092-01
Appendix B
Command Reference
Command Summary
Table B-1
Command Summary (continued)
Command
Privilege
Level
Summary Description
install list
15
Lists software updates and images
currently available on a configured
repository.
“install list” section on
page B-28
install update
15
Installs software updates and images
from a configured repository.
“install update” section on
page B-29
interface
15
Configures an Ethernet interface.
“interface” section on
page B-29
ip
domain-name
15
Defines a default domain name.
“ip domain-name” section on
page B-31
Location of Full Description
ip name-server 15
Specifies the address of up to three name “ip name-server” section on
servers for name and address resolution. page B-32
listbackup
15
Lists all current backups at the configured “listbackup” section on
site.
page B-33
mail
15
Debugs and tests email settings.
“mail” section on page B-34
mailcntrl clear
15
Deletes the maillog, sendqueue, or
userqueue.
“mailcntrl clear” section on
page B-34
mailcntrl list
15
Lists the size of the userlog, userqueue, or “mailcntrl list” section on
the sendqueue.
page B-35
mailroute
15
Forwards email to a specified server.
“mailroute” section on
page B-36
nslookup
15
Translates a DNS name to its IP address
or an IP address to its DNS name.
“nslookup” section on
page B-36
ntp server
15
Configures the Network Time Protocol
(NTP) and allow the system clock to be
synchronized by a time server.
“ntp server” section on
page B-37
ping
0
Sends ICMP echo_request packets for
diagnosing basic network connectivity.
“ping” section on page B-10
reload
151
Reboots the system.
“reload” section on page B-39
reinitdb
15
Reinitializes the database.
“reinitdb” section on
page B-40
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
B-5
Appendix B
Command Reference
Command Summary
Table B-1
Command Summary (continued)
Command
Privilege
Level
Summary Description
repository
15
Configures the Wireless LAN Solution
Engine to be a repository server.
repository add
15
Transfers software updates and images
“repository add” section on
from a remote server to the Wireless LAN page B-41
Solution Engine’s local repository.
repository
delete
15
Deletes software updates and images on
the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s
local repository.
repository list
15
Lists software updates and images on the “repository list” section on
configured local or remote repository.
page B-43
repository
server
15
Starts, stops, or displays the status of the “repository server” section on
Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s local
page B-44
repository.
restore
15
Restores a backed up configuration.
“restore” section on page B-45
route
15
Adds a route through a gateway device.
“route” section on page B-46
services
15
Lists, starts, or stops management
services.
“services” section on
page B-46
show anilog
15
Displays the Wireless LAN Solution
Engine’s ANI log.
“show anilog” section on
page B-48
show auth-cli
15
Displays the type of authentication used
for secure CLI access.
“show auth-cli” section on
page B-49
show auth-http 15
Displays the type of authentication used
for secure HTTP access.
“show auth-http” section on
page B-49
show
backupconfig
15
Displays the current backup and restore
configuration.
“show backupconfig” section
on page B-50
show bootlog
0
Displays the messages logged during the “show bootlog” section on
last system boot.
page B-51
show cdp
neighbor
15
Displays the WLSE’s nearest neighbor on “show cdp neighbor” section
the network.,
on page B-52
Location of Full Description
“repository” section on
page B-40
“repository delete” section on
page B-42
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
B-6
78-14092-01
Appendix B
Command Reference
Command Summary
Table B-1
Command Summary (continued)
Command
Privilege
Level
Summary Description
show cdp run
15
Displays the Cisco Discovery Protocol
(CDP) configuration.
“show cdp run” section on
page B-52
show clock
0
Displays the system date and time in
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).
“show clock” section on
page B-11
show
collectorlog
15
Displays the Wireless LAN Solution
Engine’s collector log.
“show collectorlog” section on
page B-53
show config
15
Displays the system configuration.
“show config” section on
page B-54
show
daemonslog
15
Displays the Wireless LAN Solution
Engine’s daemons log.
“show daemonslog” section on
page B-55
show dmgtdlog 15
Displays the Wireless LAN Solution
Engine’s daemon manager log.
“show dmgtdlog” section on
page B-56
show
domain-name
0
Displays the system domain name
“show domain-name” section
on page B-12
show
hseaccesslog
15
Displays the Wireless LAN Solution
Engine’s Web access log.
“show hseaccesslog” section
on page B-57
show
hseerrorlog
15
Displays the Wireless LAN Solution
Engine’s Web error log.
“show hseerrorlog” section on
page B-58
show
hsesslaccesslo
g
15
Displays the Wireless LAN Solution
Engine’s Web SSL log.
“show hsesslaccesslog”
section on page B-59
show import
15
Displays imported host files.
“show import” section on
page B-59
show install
logs
15
Displays the software updates and images “show install logs” section on
available on the configured repository.
page B-60
Location of Full Description
show interfaces 0
Displays information about the system
network interface.
“show interfaces” section on
page B-13
show ipchains
Displays the IP chains for the selected
interface.
“show ipchains” section on
page B-60
15
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
B-7
Appendix B
Command Reference
Command Summary
Table B-1
Command Summary (continued)
Command
Privilege
Level
Summary Description
show hosts
15
Displays the Wireless LAN Solution
Engine’s host file.
“show hosts” section on
page B-61
show maillog
15
Displays the Wireless LAN Solution
Engine’s mail log.
“show maillog” section on
page B-62
show process
0
Displays information about processes
running on the system.
“show process” section on
page B-13
show
repository
15
Displays the status or the access log of a
configured repository.
“show repository” section on
page B-63
show route
15
Displays the routes currently configured. “show route” section on
page B-64
show
securitylog
15
Displays the Wireless LAN Solution
Engine’s secure log information.
“show securitylog” section on
page B-64
show
snmp-server
15
Displays the Wireless LAN Solution
Engine’s SNMP configuration.
“show snmp-server” section
on page B-66
show
ssh-version
15
Displays the type of SSH enabled.
“show ssh-version” section on
page B-66
show syslog
15
Displays syslog information.
“show syslog” section on
page B-67
show tech
15
Displays information necessary for
Cisco’s Technical Assistance Center to
assist you.
“show tech” section on
page B-68
show
telnetenable
15
Displays the Wireless LAN Solution
Engine’s Telnet status.
“show telnetenable” section on
page B-68
show
tomcatlog
15
Displays the Wireless LAN Solution
Engine’s Tomcat log.
“show tomcatlog” section on
page B-69
show version
0
Displays information about the current
software on the system.
“show version” section on
page B-14
shutdown
15
Shuts down the system in preparation for “shutdown” section on
powering it off.
page B-70
Location of Full Description
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
B-8
78-14092-01
Appendix B
Command Reference
Command Description Conventions
Table B-1
Command Summary (continued)
Command
Privilege
Level
Summary Description
snmp-server
15
Configures an snmp agent.
“snmp-server” section on
page B-71
ssh
15
Connects to an external host using SSH
“ssh” section on page B-71
ssh-version
15
Enables Secure Shell (SSH) 1, SSH 2, or “ssh-version” section on
both SSH 1 and SSH 2.
page B-72
telnet
15
Telnets to an external host.
“telnet” section on page B-72
telnetenable
15
Configures Telnet access.
“telnetenable” section on
page B-73
traceroute
0
Displays the network route to a specified “traceroute” section on
host and identify faulty gateways.
page B-15
username
15
Creates a new user account or changes an “username” section on
account’s properties.
page B-74
Location of Full Description
1. This command is also available in the maintenance image.
2. This command is available only in the maintenance image.
Command Description Conventions
Command descriptions in this document and in the CLI help system use the
following conventions:
•
Vertical bars (|) separate alternative, mutually exclusive elements.
•
Square brackets ([ ]) indicate optional elements.
•
Braces ({ }) indicate a required choice. Braces within square brackets ([{ }])
indicate a required choice within an optional element.
•
Boldface indicates commands and keywords that are entered literally as
shown.
•
Italics indicate arguments for which you supply values.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
B-9
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 0 Commands
Privilege Level 0 Commands
This section describes the privilege level 0 commands.
exit
To log out of the system, use the exit command.
exit
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Example
The following command logs you out of the system:
exit
ping
To send ICMP echo_request packets for diagnosing basic network connectivity,
use the ping command.
ping [-c count] [-i wait] [-s packetsize] [-n] {hostname | ip-address}
Syntax Description
c
Sets the number of echo packets to send.
count
Number of echo packets to send.
i
Sets the amount of time to wait between sending each packet.
wait
Amount of time to wait between sending each packet, in
seconds. The default is 1.
s
Sets the size of each echo packet.
packetsize
The size of each echo packet, in bytes. The default is 56.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
B-10
78-14092-01
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 0 Commands
hostname
Host name of system to ping.
ip-address
IP address of system to ping.
n
disables reverse DNS lookup.
Usage Guidelines
To use this command with the hostname argument, DNS must be configured on
the system. To force the time-out of a nonresponsive host or to eliminate a loop
cycle, press Ctrl-c.
Example
This command sends 4 echo packets to the host otherhost with a wait time of
5 seconds between each packet:
ping -c 4 -i 5 209.165.200.224
PING 209.165.200.224 (209.165.200.224) from 209.165.201.0 : 56(84)
bytes of data.
64 bytes from dns-sj1.cisco.com (209.165.200.224): icmp_seq=0 ttl=246
time=16.3 ms
64 bytes from dns-sj1.cisco.com (209.165.200.224): icmp_seq=1 ttl=246
time=2.0 ms
64 bytes from dns-sj1.cisco.com (209.165.200.224): icmp_seq=2 ttl=246
time=2.1 ms
64 bytes from dns-sj1.cisco.com (209.165.200.224): icmp_seq=3 ttl=246
time=2.1 ms
show clock
To display the system date and time in Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), use
the show clock command.
show clock
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
B-11
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 0 Commands
Usage Guidelines
Use the show clock command to display the system date and time. For more
information about the system time, see the section “Setting System Date and
Time” in the Installation and Configuration Guide for the Cisco 1105 Wireless
LAN Solution Engine.
Example
This command displays the system date and time:
show clock
12:43:47 Jun 20 2001
Related Commands
clock
ntp server
show domain-name
To display the system domain name, use the show domain-name command.
show domain-name
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Example
This command displays the system domain name:
show domain-name
cisco.com
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
B-12
78-14092-01
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 0 Commands
show interfaces
To display information about the system network interface, use the show
interfaces command.
show interfaces
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Example
This command displays information about system network interfaces:
show interfaces
eth0
Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:02:B3:35:FD:CC
inet addr:209.165.200.224 Bcast:209.165.201.0
Mask:255.255.255.224
UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1
RX packets:80309 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
TX packets:22451 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0
collisions:0 txqueuelen:100
Interrupt:5 Base address:0xef00 Memory:d0c7e000-d0c7ec40
Related Commands
interface
show process
To display information about processes running on the system, use the show
process command.
show process [page]
Syntax Description
page
Displays command output one screen at a time. Press the
Return key to display the next output screen. Press Ctrl-c to
exit paged output and return to the command prompt.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
B-13
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 0 Commands
Example
This command displays information about processes running on the system:
show process page
PID PPID
ELAPSED
SZ
1
0 4-20:04:35
277
2
1 4-20:04:35
0
3
1 4-20:04:35
0
4
1 4-20:04:35
0
5
1 4-20:04:35
0
6
1 4-20:04:28
0
81
1 4-20:04:25
0
82
1 4-20:04:25
0
83
1 4-20:04:25
0
84
1 4-20:04:25
0
85
1 4-20:04:24
0
199
1 4-20:04:23
290
213
1 4-20:04:23
342
402
1 4-20:04:17
290
411
1 4-20:04:17
360
517
1 4-20:04:15
327
531
1 4-20:04:15
286
540
1 4-20:04:14
585
585
1 4-20:04:09
842
-----------more-----------
Fri
Fri
Fri
Fri
Fri
Fri
Fri
Fri
Fri
Fri
Fri
Fri
Fri
Fri
Fri
Fri
Fri
Fri
Fri
Jun
Jun
Jun
Jun
Jun
Jun
Jun
Jun
Jun
Jun
Jun
Jun
Jun
Jun
Jun
Jun
Jun
Jun
Jun
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
STARTED TTY
16:54:03 2001 ?
16:54:03 2001 ?
16:54:03 2001 ?
16:54:03 2001 ?
16:54:03 2001 ?
16:54:10 2001 ?
16:54:13 2001 ?
16:54:13 2001 ?
16:54:13 2001 ?
16:54:13 2001 ?
16:54:14 2001 ?
16:54:15 2001 ?
16:54:15 2001 ?
16:54:21 2001 ?
16:54:21 2001 ?
16:54:23 2001 ?
16:54:23 2001 ?
16:54:24 2001 ?
16:54:29 2001 ?
COMMAND
init
kflushd
kupdate
kpiod
kswapd
kreiserfsd
kreiserfsd
kreiserfsd
kreiserfsd
kreiserfsd
kreiserfsd
watchdog
idled
syslogd
klogd
crond
inetd
sshd
dmgtd.lnx
show version
To display information about the current software on the system, use the show
version command.
show version
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Example
This command displays the current software on the system:
show version
Copyright (c) 1999-2000 by Cisco Systems, Inc.
Build Version (166) Mon Jun 11 16:56:23 PDT 2001
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
B-14
78-14092-01
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 0 Commands
Uptime: 4 days 20 hours 6 mins
Linux/UID32 version 2.2.16-13bipsec.uid32 (gcc version egcs1
traceroute
To display the network route to a specified host and identify faulty gateways, use
the traceroute command.
traceroute [-f first_ttl] [-m max_ttl] [-w waittime] host [packetlength]
Syntax Description
-f
(Optional) Sets the time-to-live used in the first outgoing
probe packet.
first_ttl
Time-to-live value of the first outgoing probe packet. The
default is 1 hop.
-m
(Optional) Sets the maximum time-to-live (maximum
number of hops) used in outgoing probe packets.
max_ttl
Maximum time-to-live for outgoing probe packets. The
default is 30 hops.
-w
(Optional) Sets the time to wait for a response to a probe, in
seconds.
waittime
Time to wait for a response to a probe, in seconds. The
default is 5.
host
Name or IP address of host to which to connect.
packetlength
(Optional) The length of the packet to send, in bytes. The
default and minimum value is 40.
Usage Guidelines
Use the traceroute command to trace the network route to a specified host and
identify faulty gateways. The command displays a list of the hosts that receive
probe packets as they travel to the destination host, in the order that the receiving
hosts receive the packets. Asterisks (*) appear as the list entry for hosts that do
not respond to probing correctly.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
B-15
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
Example
This command displays the network route to the host otherhost with a packet
time-to-live value of 2, a wait time of 5 seconds, and 50-byte packets:
traceroute -m 20 -w 10 cisco.com 50
traceroute to example.com (209.165.200.224), 20 hops max, 50 byte
packets
1 ex1.com (209.165.200.225) 0.981 ms 0.919 ms 0.926 ms
2 ex2.com (209.165.200.254) 1.528 ms 0.747 ms 0.661 ms
3 ex3.com (209.165.200.255) 0.887 ms 0.770 ms 0.744 ms
4 ex4.com (209.165.201.0) 0.932 ms 0.789 ms 0.679 ms
5 ex5.com (209.165.201.1) 1.066 ms 1.052 ms 0.983 ms
6 ex6.com (209.165.201.30) 1.472 ms 1.247 ms 1.847 ms
7 ex7.com(209.165.201.31) 1.738 ms 1.424 ms 1.658 ms
8 ex8.com (209.165.202.128) 3.728 ms 2.429 ms 2.804 ms
9 ex9.com (209.165.202.129) 6.283 ms 5.499 ms 3.285 ms
10 ex10.com (209.165.202.158) 9.926 ms 73.463 ms 3.895 ms
11 ex11.com (209.165.202.159) 70.967 ms * 47.106 ms
Related Commands
ping
Privilege Level 15 Commands
This section describes the privilege level 15 commands. Only users with privilege
level 15 can run them.
auth
Use the auth command to enable secure remote authentication.
auth {cli | http} {local | tacacs secret server1 [server2] | radius secret
server1 [server2] | nt domain pdc [bdc]}
Syntax Description
cli
Enables authentication using the Command Line Interface
(CLI).
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
B-16
78-14092-01
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
http
Enables authentication using Hypertext Transfer Protocol
(HTTP).
local
Enables local authentication.
tacacs
Enables authentication using the Terminal Access Controller
Access Control System (TACACS).
radius
Enables authentication using Remote Dial-In User Service
(RADIUS).
nt
Enables authentication from an NT domain controller.
secret
Shared secret code of server.
server1
IP address or DNS name of server from which authentication
will occur.
server2
IP address or DNS name of optional secondary server from
which authentication could occur
domain
NT domain name.
pdc
Name of the Primary Domain Controller (PDC).
bdc
Name of the Backup Domain Controller (BDC).
Example
This command enables secure remote authentication from a remote server, using
TACACS.
auth http tacacs tr5e43 209.165.200.224
backup
Use the backup command to back upthe WLSE.
backup [test]
Syntax Description
test
Tests the configured backup hostname, username, password,
and directory.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
B-17
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
Usage Guidelines
To back up the WLSE, use the backup command. To configure the backup
location, use the backupconfig command.
Example
The following command backs up the WLSE:
backup
Related Commands
backupconfig
listbackup
restore
show backupconfig
backupconfig
Use the backupconfig command to set the configuration for all backup and
restore operations. To clear the backup and restore configuration information, use
the no backupconfig command.
backupconfig {hostname} {username} {password} [directory]
no backupconfig
Syntax Description
hostname
Host name or IP address of the host system.
username
Username of host system.
password
Password of the host system.
directory
Path to specific backup directory, if different from user’s
default directory.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
B-18
78-14092-01
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
Usage guidelines
To set the configuration for all backup and restore operations, use the backup
command.
Example
The following command will configure the backup and restore operations to
backup to and restore from host 209.165.200.224, set the username to user1, and
set the password to pass:
backupconfig 209.165.200.224 user1 pass
The following command clears all backup and restore configuration information:
no backupconfig
Related Commands
backup
listbackup
restore
show backupconfig
cdp
Use the cdp command to configure the Cisco Discovery Protocol
cdp {run [port] | timer seconds | holdtime seconds}
no cdp {run [port] | timer | holdtime}
Syntax Description
run
start cdp
timer
set cdp packets retransmission time.
holdtime
set cdp packet info hold time.
port
Ethernet port on which CDP will be enabled. Acceptable
values are eth0-15.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
B-19
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
seconds
amount of time, in seconds, that the system takes to either
transmit the cdp packet information or to hold another
system’s cdp packet information.
Usage Guidelines
Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) is a protocol by which one Cisco device can
recognize, and be recognized by, another Cisco device. The run command starts
the system sending out signals to the other systems. The timer command sets the
amount of time, in seconds, that these signals are sent. The holdtime sets the
amount of time a system will recognize another system without receiving a signal.
For example, if your system’s holdtime is set to 30 seconds, and another system
that has already been recognized by yours does not send a signal within that
30 seconds, your system will cease to recognize it. If you are using the no cdp
command, the timer and holdtime commands set their respective values to the
default value.
Example
This command sets the cdp packet’s retransmission time at 10 seconds.
cdp timer 10
This command sets the cdp packet’s retransmission to its default time.
no cdp timer
clock
To set the system date and time, use the clock command. See the Usage
Guidelines before using this command.
clock {set hh:mm:ss month day year}
Syntax Description
set
Sets the system clock.
hh:mm:ss
Current time (for example, 13:32:00).
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
B-20
78-14092-01
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
month
Current month. You can enter full month names or
abbreviations that include at least the first 3 characters of the
month name (for example, jan, feb, mar).
day
Day of the month (for example, 1 to 31).
year
Current year (for example, 2000).
Usage Guidelines
When resetting the time, you must stop and restart WLSE services:
Step 1
Stop services:
services stop
Step 2
Change the time.
Step 3
Start services:
services start
To set the date and time, use the set option.
If you configure the system to use Network Time Protocol (NTP), you do not need
to set the system clock manually using the clock command.When setting the
clock, enter the current time in Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).
For more information about the system time, refer to “Setting System Date and
Time” in the Installation and Configuration Guide for the Cisco 1105 Wireless
LAN Solution Engine.
Example
This command sets the date and time:
clock set 16:00:00 dec 11 2001
Tue Dec 11 16:00:00 UTC 2001
Related Commands
ntp server
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
B-21
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
show clock
df
To display the current storage usage on the WLSE, use the df command.
df
Usage Guidelines
This command in primarily intended as a debugging tool for problems with full
partitions.
Example
The following command displays the current storage usage on the WLSE:
df
Filesystem
/dev/sda12
/dev/sda1
/dev/sda7
/dev/sda8
/dev/sda6
/dev/sda13
/dev/sda9
/dev/sda10
/dev/sda5
Size
151M
49M
985M
601M
1001M
9.7G
601M
591M
2.9G
Used Avail Use% Mounted on
59M
92M 39% /
2.8M
44M
6% /boot
24M 911M
3% /extra
32M 569M
5% /home
136M 865M 14% /opt
32M 9.7G
0% /tftpboot
32M 569M
5% /tmp
212M 350M 38% /usr
450M 2.5G 15% /var
erase config
To erase the configuration in flash memory and reload the device, use the erase
config command.
erase config
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
B-22
78-14092-01
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to erase the configuration in Flash memory and reload the
device.
When you enter the command, you are prompted for confirmation. Enter yes to
confirm, or press Enter to accept the default response no.
Caution
When you confirm this command, the system configuration is erased and the
system reboots automatically. The system will not operate until you
reconfigure it.
When the system reboots, you must reconfigure it with the setup program. For
information about using the setup program, refer to the Installation and
Configuration Guide for the Cisco 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine.
Example
This command erases the system configuration:
erase config
This will erase your configuration, return device t
o factory defaults, and reload the device
Do you want to continue?[no]:yes
firewall
To implement port filtering on the WLSE, use the firewall command.
firewall eth <0-5> [public | private] | [icmp telnet ssh snmp https 1741]
Syntax Description
eth <0-5>
Port to be configured. Acceptable values are eth0-5.
public
Denies access via ICMP, Telnet, SNMP, and the HTTP 1741
port.
private
Denies no access.
icmp
Denies Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) ping
messages.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
B-23
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
telnet
Denies incoming Telnet connections.
ssh
Denies incoming SSH connections.
snmp
Denies incoming SNMP requests.
https
Denies all connections to the SSL HTTP port.
1741
Denies all connections to the HTTP 1741 port.
Usage Guidelines
Use the firewall command to implement port filtering on the WLSE. To configure
an Ethernet port for secured public access, use the public option. To configure an
Ethernet port for local access, via a LAN or VLAN, use the private option. To
dissable icmp, Telnet, ssh, snmp, https, or to deny connections to the SSL HTTP
port or the HTTP 1741 port, use its corresponding option.
Example
The following is an example of a secure Ethernet port configuration:
•
The Ethernet 0 port is connected to the Internet, and is configured to be
accessible only via HTTPS by entering the following command:
firewall eth0 public ssh 1741
•
The Ethernet 1 port is connected to an internal LAN or VLAN, and is
configured to be accessible via any of the supported protocols by entering the
following command:
firewall eth1 private
An on-site user has full access to the WLSE, but an external user can only
access it using a secure connection.
gethostbyname
Use the gethostbyname command to display the IP address of a known domain
name.
gethostbyname host
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
B-24
78-14092-01
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
Syntax Description
host
Domain name of host.
Example
This command displays the IP address of example.com
gethostbyname example.com
209.165.200.224
hostname
To change the system hostname, use the hostname command.
hostname name
Syntax Description
name
New hostname for the WLSE; the name is case sensitive and
may be from 1 to 22 alphanumeric characters.
Example
The following example changes the hostname to sandbox:
hostname sandbox
import
To import host files, or to map IP addresses to hostnames, use the import
command:
import {host hostname ipaddress} | {hosts ftp-host username password path}
no import {host hostname ipaddress} | {hosts}
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
B-25
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
Syntax Description
host
Maps one IP address to a hostname.
hostname
Hostname to map IP address to.
hosts
Imports host files from ftp accessible host.
ipaddress
IP address to map Hostname to.
password
Password used to access ftp accessible host.
path
Path to ftp accessible host.
ftp-host
IP address of ftp accessible host.
username
username use to access ftp accessible host.
Usage Guidelines
To map a single hostname to an IP address, enter the import command as follows
import host hostname ipaddress
To import host files from an external, ftp accessible server, enter the import
command as follows:
import hosts ftp-host username password path
To remove an individual IP address from a host file, use the no version of the
import command as follows:
no import host hostname ipaddress
To remove an imported host file, use the no version of the import command as
follows:
no import hosts
Example
This command imports host files from the ftp accessible server ftpserver_1.
Ftpserver_1 has the username admin, the password pass, and the path
/ftpserver_1/hosts.
import hosts ftpserver_1 admin pass /ftpserver_1/hosts
This command deletes the hosts imported in the example above:
no import hosts
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
B-26
78-14092-01
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
install configure
To define the repository that the Wireless LAN Solution Engine uses to install
software updates and images, use the install configure command.
install configure {URL URL Value | default | save}
Syntax Description
URL
Sets the URL of the repository.
URL Value
The URL of the repository. The URL should take the form of
http://host:port/path (the path is not a requirement).
default
Configures the Wireless LAN Solution Engine to be its own
repository. The URL is http://localhost:9851.
save
Saves the current configuration in the install.ini file.
Usage Guidelines
The install configure command defines the repository that the Wireless LAN
Solution Engine uses. A repository is a remote or local server from where a
system can download software updates and images. Only HTTP is supported.
Example
The following command configures the Wireless LAN Solution Engine to use
http://209.165.200.22, with port 9851, as a repository:
install configure URL http://209.165.200.224:9851
Related Commands
install update
install list
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
B-27
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
install list
To list software updates and images currently available on the configured
repository, use the install list command.
install list [all | full | page | updates]
Syntax Description
all
Displays all software updates and images on a configured
repository. This command displays the name, the version, the
requirements, the type, and a summary of the software.
full
Displays only the complete images on a configured
repository.This command displays the name, the version, the
requirements, the type, and a summary of the image.
page
Displays only the names of all software updates and images
on a configured repository. All other information is omitted.
updates
Displays only the updates on a configured repository. This
command displays the name, the version, the requirements,
the type, and a summary of the update.
Usage Guidelines
The install list command displays software updates and images currently
available on a repository. A repository is a remote or local server from where a
system can receive software.
Example
Enter the following command to display a list of all available software updates
and images on a configured repository:
install list all
Name
Version Requires
EX-1.02
1.02
HSE-1.0
EX-1.1aR
1.1aR
HSE-1.1
EX-1.1a
1.1a
HSE-1.1
EX-1.0a
1.0a
HSE-1.0
EX-1.0aR
1.0aR
HSE-1.0
EX-1.0-ROB
1.0
HSE-1.0
EX-1.0
1.0
HSE-1.0
Type
UPDATE
UPDATE
UPDATE
UPDATE
UPDATE
COMPLETE
COMPLETE
Summary
Hosting
Hosting
Hosting
Hosting
Hosting
Hosting
Hosting
Solution...
Solution...
Solution...
Solution...
Solution...
Solution...
Solution...
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
B-28
78-14092-01
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
Related Commands
install configure
install update
install update
To install a software update or image, use the install update command.
install update package name
Syntax Description
Package Name
Name of the software update or image to be installed. To see
the names of software updates and images available for
installation, use the install list command. For more
information, see the “install list” section on page B-28.
Example
The following command installs the update EX-2.0:
install update EX-2.0
Related Commands
install configure
install list
interface
To configure an Ethernet interface, use the interface command.
interface eth<0-5> {[up | down] | ipaddress netmask [default-gateway
address] [up | down]}
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
B-29
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
Syntax Description
eth<0-5>
Name of the interface port to be configured. Acceptable
values are eth0-5.
up
Enables the interface (the default).
If you include the ipaddress parameter and want to enable
the interface in the same command, either enter the up
parameter after ipaddress and its required parameters, or do
not specify the up or down parameters (up is the default).
down
Disables the interface.
If you include the ipaddress parameter and want to disable
the interface in the same command, enter the down
parameter after ipaddress and its required parameters.
ipaddress
The IP address of the interface.
netmask
The netmask of the interface IP address.
default-gateway
Changes the IP address of the default gateway that connects
the WLSE to the network.
address
The gateway IP address.
Default
When you enter the interface command, the interface that you specify is enabled
by default. If you want to disable an enabled interface or leave a disabled interface
disabled, you must specify the down option.
Usage Guidelines
Use the interface command to configure an Ethernet interface.
If you change the IP address or hostname, follow these steps to ensure that
applications using the system can connect to it correctly:
Step 1
Stop and restart management services by entering:
# services stop
# services start
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
B-30
78-14092-01
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
Step 2
Verify that management applications that use the system can still connect to it.
Step 3
Reconnect any applications that cannot connect to it using the system’s new IP
address or hostname.
Example
This command disables the Ethernet 1 interface:
interface eth1 down
This command sets the Ethernet 0 IP address, netmask, and gateway IP address:
interface eth0 209.165.200.224 255.255.255.224 default-gateway
209.165.201.31 up
ip domain-name
To define a default domain name, use the ip domain-name command. To remove
the default domain name, use the no form of the command.
ip domain-name name
no ip domain-name name
Syntax Description
name
Domain name (e.g. cisco.com).
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to define a default domain name.
A default domain name allows the system to resolve any unqualified host names.
Any IP hostname that does not contain a domain name will have the configured
domain name appended to it. If you are using a DNS server, this appended name
is resolved by the DNS server, and then added to the host table.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
B-31
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
Example
This command defines the default domain name cisco.com:
ip domain-name cisco.com
This command removes the default domain name:
no ip domain-name
Related Commands
ip name-server
ip name-server
To specify the address of up to three name servers for name and address
resolution, use the ip name-server command. To disable a name server, use the
no form of the command.
ip name-server ip-address
no ip name-server ip-address
Syntax Description
ip-address
Name server IP address (maximum of 3).
Usage Guidelines
Use the ip name-server command to point the system to a specific DNS server.
You may configure up to three servers.
If you attempt to configure a fourth name server, the following error message
appears:
# Name-server table is full.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
B-32
78-14092-01
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
The system must have a functional DNS server configured to function correctly.
If it does not, in most cases it will not correctly process requests from
management applications that use it. If the system cannot obtain DNS services
from the network, Telnet connections to the system will fail or Telnet interaction
with the system will become extremely slow.
Example
This command assigns a name server for the system to use for DNS name to
address resolution:
ip name-server 209.165.200.224
This command disables the name server; the system will not use it for name to
address resolution:
no ip name-server 209.165.200.224
Related Commands
ip domain-name
listbackup
Use the listbackup command to list all current backups at the configured site.
listbackup
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Example
The following command lists all current backups at the configured site:
listbackup
ex1_06042001_170640:
ex1_06052001_124543:
ex1_06052001_155148:
ex1_06202001_145704:
Hostname:
Hostname:
Hostname:
Hostname:
ex1
ex1
ex1
ex1
Date:
Date:
Date:
Date:
06042001
06052001
06052001
06202001
time:
time:
time:
time:
1700
1243
1558
1454
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
B-33
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
Related Commands
backup
backupconfig
restore
show backupconfig
mail
To debug and test email settings, use the mail command.
mail [to user@host [debug]]
Usage Guidelines
Entering the mail command with no arguments will allow you to read email.
Entering the mail command with the arguments listed will allow you to send
email.
Syntax Description
to
Sends email to the expressed recipient.
user@host
Recipient of the email.
debug
Debugs any email problems.
Example
The following command sends an email message:
mail to johndoe@example.com
mailcntrl clear
To delete the maillog, sendqueue, or userqueue, use the mailcntrl clear
command.
mailcntrl clear {log | sendqueue | userqueue}
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
B-34
78-14092-01
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
Syntax Description
log
Clears the WLSE’s email log.
sendqueue
Clears the WLSE’s sendqueue.
userqueue
Clears the WLSE’s userqueue.
Example
The following command clears the WLSE’s email log.
mailcntrl clear log
Related Commands
mailcntrl list
mailcntrl list
To list the size of the userlog, userqueue, or the sendqueue, use the mailcntrl list
command.
mailcntrl list {logsize | sendqueuesize | userqueuesize}
Syntax Description
logsize
Size of the mail log.
sendqueuesize
Size of the sendqueue.
userqueuesize
Size of the userqueue.
Example
The following command displays the size of the WLSE’s email log.
mailcntrl list logsize
Mail log files total size: 4.0k
Related Commands
mailcntrl clear
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
B-35
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
mailroute
To forward email to a specified SMPT server, use the mailroute command. If no
server is specified, the WLSE will use DNS to resolve the correct email server in
your local domain.
mailroute {hostname | ip-address}
Syntax Description
hostname
Host name of an email server.
ip-address
IP address of an email server.
Example
The following command forwards email to a server with the hostname mailserver:
mailroute mailserver
nslookup
To translate a DNS name to its IP address or an IP address to its DNS name, use
the nslookup command.
nslookup {dns-name | ip-address}
Syntax Description
dns-name
DNS name of a host on the network.
ip-address
IP address of a host on the network.
Example
The following command translates the DNS name hostname to its IP address:
nslookup hostname
Server: dns.ex1.com
Address: 209.165.200.224
Name:
ex1.com
Address: 209.165.201.0
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
B-36
78-14092-01
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
ntp server
To configure the Network Time Protocol (NTP) and allow the system clock to be
synchronized by a time server, use the ntp server command. To disable this
function, use the no form of this command.
ntp server ip-address
no ntp server ip-address
Syntax Description
ip-address
IP address of the NTP time server providing clock
synchronization.
Usage Guidelines
Use the ntp server command to synchronize the system clock with the specified
NTP server. If you configure multiple NTP servers, the system will synchronize
with the first working NTP server it finds. There is no limit to the number of NTP
servers that you can configure.
The ntp server command validates the NTP server that you specify. The possible
results are:
•
If the server is a valid NTP server, a message similar to the following appears:
# 19 Jan 00:43:48 ntpdate[1437]: step time server 209.165.200.224
offset 999.257304
•
If no NTP server with the name or IP address you specified exists, a message
similar to the following appears:
# 19 Jan 00:43:40 ntpdate[1431]: no server suitable for
synchronization found
In this case, remove the NTP server by using the no form of the command,
then configure a valid NTP server.
•
If the system time is set to a time later than the time on the NTP server, a
message similar to the following appears:
# 19 Jan 00:43:58 ntpdate[1265]: Can’t adjust the time of day:
Invalid argument.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
B-37
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
In this case, the ntp server command is entered into the system
configuration, but NTP will not function. Follow these steps to remove the
command and configure NTP correctly:
Step 1
Remove the ntp server command from the configuration by entering the no form
of the command. For example:
no ntp server
ip-address
where ip-address is the IP address of the NTP server.
Step 2
Set the system clock to a time that is behind the time on the NTP server using the
clock set command. For more information about the clock command, refer to the
“clock” section on page B-20.
Step 3
Enter the ntp server command again to configure the NTP server on the system.
For example:
ntp server
ip-address
Example
This command configures the system to use an NTP server:
ntp server 209.165.201.0
This command configures the system to stop using the NTP server:
no ntp server 209.165.201.0
Related Commands
clock
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
B-38
78-14092-01
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
reload
To reboot the system, use the reload command.
reload
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Usage Guidelines
Use the reload command to reboot the system.
You are prompted to verify the reload. Enter yes to confirm or no to cancel the
reload.
Caution
All processes running on the system stop when you run the reload command.
The WLSE will not respond while it is reloading.
Example
This command reboots the system:
reload
Related Commands
shutdown
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
B-39
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
reinitdb
To reinitialize the database, use the reinitdb command.
reinitdb
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Usage Guidelines
The reinitdb command reinitializes the database. This erases all information
contained within the database.
Example
This command reinitializes the database:
reinitdb
repository
To configure the Wireless LAN Solution Engine to be a repository server, use the
repository command.
repository source URL
Syntax Description
source
Sets the location from where the local repository downloads
software updates and images.
URL
The IP address of an external server containing software
updates and images.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
B-40
78-14092-01
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
Usage Guidelines
The repository command allows the Wireless LAN Solution Engine to be a
repository both for itself and for external systems. A repository is a remote or
local server from where a system can receive software updates and images.
The repository command only configures the Wireless LAN Solution Engine to
be a repository. To configure the Wireless LAN Solution Engine to install
software updates and images from this repository, see the “install configure”
section on page B-27.
Example
To configure the Wireless LAN Solution Engine to be a repository, and to
download software updates and images from http:// 209.165.200.224, enter the
following command:
repository source ftp://209.165.200.224
Related Commands
repository add
repository delete
repository list
repository server
repository add
To transfer software updates and images from a remote server to the Wireless
LAN Solution Engine’s local repository, use the repository add command.
repository add package
Syntax Description
package
Name of the software update or image to be transferred.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
B-41
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
Usage Guidelines
The repository add command transfers software updates and images from a
remote server to the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s local repository. You will
be prompted to enter a username and password if they are needed to access the
remote server.
Example
To transfer the update EX_2.0 from an update server to the local repository, enter
the following command:
repository add ex_2.0
Related Commands
repository
repository delete
repository list
repository server
repository delete
To delete software updates and images on the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s
local repository, use the repository delete command.
repository delete [package | all]
Syntax Description
all
Deletes all software updates and images in the local
repository.
package
Name of the software update or image to be deleted.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
B-42
78-14092-01
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
Usage Guidelines
The repository delete command deletes software updates and images on the
Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s local repository. A repository is a remote or
local server from where a system can receive software updates and images.
Example
The following command deletes the update EX_2.0 from the local repository:
repository delete EX_2.0
Related Commands
repository
repository add
repository list
repository server
repository list
To list software updates and images on the configured local or remote repository,
use the repository list command.
repository list {local | remote} [detail] [page]
Syntax Description
local
Lists software updates and packages on the local repository.
remote
Lists software updates and packages on a remote repository.
detail
Includes details of the software updates and images
displayed.
page
Displays the software updates and packages on page at a
time.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
B-43
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
Example
To list the software updates and images available on the configured local
repository, with details and one page at a time, enter the following command:
repository list local detail page
Related Commands
repository
repository add
repository delete
repository server
repository server
To start, stop, or view the status of the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s local
repository, use the repository server command.
repository server [stop | start | status]
Syntax Description
stop
Stops the local repository.
start
Starts the local repository.
Status
Displays the status of the local repository.
Usage Guidelines
The repository server command starts, stops, or displays the status of the
Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s local repository. A repository is a remote or
local server from where a system can receive software updates and images.
Example
The following command stops the local repository:
repository server stop
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
B-44
78-14092-01
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
Related Commands
repository
repository add
repository delete
repository list
restore
Use the restore command to restore a backed up configuration of the WLSE.
restore restore name
Syntax Description
restore name
Name of backup to be used to restore the WLSE.
Usage Guidelines
To restore a configuration, use the restore command. If you use the restore
command all current domains, roles, users, and discovery configuration
information will be erased.
Example
The following command will restore a backed up configuration:
restore backup1
Releated Commands
backup
backupconfig
listbackup
show backupconfig
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
B-45
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
route
To add a route through a gateway device, use the route command. To delete a
route, use the no version of the command.
route {network address} netmask {network netmask} gateway {gateway
address}
no route {network address} netmask {network netmask}
Syntax Description
netmask
Sets value of the network netmask.
gateway
Sets the IP address of the router or gateway.
network address
IP address of the network.
network netmask
Value of the network netmask.
gateway address
IP address of router or gateway.
Example
The following command adds a route:
route 209.165.201.0 netmask 255.255.255.224 gateway 209.165.200.224
The following command deletes the above route:
no route 209.165.201.0 netmask 255.255.255.224
services
To list, start, or stop the management services running on the system, use the
services command.
services [status | start | stop]
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
B-46
78-14092-01
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
Syntax Description
status
Displays the management services status.
start
Starts the management services.
stop
Stops the management services.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to start, stop, or view status of the management services
running on the system.
Management services are the software installed on the system by network
management applications. Use this command to stop and restart the management
services if the system is not responding correctly to a management application.
This should cause the services to reset and function properly again.
Example
This command stops management services:
services stop
This command starts management services:
services start
This command shows services status:
# services status
Process= HSECollector
State = Running but busy flag set
Pid
= 588
RC
= 0
Signo = 0
Start = 06/15/01 16:54:32
Stop
= Not applicable
Core
= Not applicable
Info
= HSECollector started.
Process= HSEANIServer
State = Running but busy flag set
Pid
= 589
RC
= 0
Signo = 0
Start = 06/15/01 16:54:32
-----------more-----------
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
B-47
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
Related Commands
show process
show anilog
To display the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s ANI log, use the show anilog
command.
show anilog [page] | include MatchString1 [MatchString2]
Syntax Description
page
Displays command output one screen at a time. Press the
Return key to display the next output screen. Press Ctrl-c to
exit paged output and return to the command prompt.
include
Filters the command output to display only the records that
contain the specified string of characters.
matchstring1
String of characters to search for in the command output.
matchstring2
(Optional) Another string of characters to search for in the
command output.
Example
The following command displays the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s ANI log,
one page at a time:
show anilog page
/var/adm/CSCOets/log/ani.log
SNMPThrPool: Instantiated ex.lib.snmp.lib.timer.DynamicThreadPool, mi
n=15, max=48, maxIdleSecs=240
2001/12/20 13:43:12 main ani MESSAGE DBConnection: Created new
Database connecti
on [hashCode = 45981573]
2001/12/20 13:43:38 main ani MESSAGE ServletServiceModule: Moxie
Servlet Engine
is ready to receive requests
2001/12/20 15:43:39 HSEStatusPoll ani MESSAGE DBConnection: Created
new Database
connection [hashCode = 85057415]
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
B-48
78-14092-01
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
2001/12/20 17:43:39 HSEStatusPoll ani MESSAGE DBConnection: Created
new Database
connection [hashCode = 396959623]
2001/12/20 19:43:39 HSEStatusPoll ani MESSAGE DBConnection: Created
new Database
--More--
show auth-cli
To display the type of authentication used for secure CLI access, use the show
auth-cli command.
show auth-cli
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Example
This command and response shows that the WLSE’s local authentication is being
used for the CLI:
show auth-cli
local
show auth-http
To display the type of authentication used for secure HTTP access, use the show
auth-http command.
show auth-http
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
B-49
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
Example
This command and response shows that the WLSE’s local authentication is being
used for the CLI:
show auth-http
local
show backupconfig
The show backupconfig command displays the current backup and restore
configuration.
show backupconfig
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Usage Guidelines
To display the current backup and restore configuration, use the show
backupconfig command. If the backup configuration has not been set, the host
and username fields display NONE.
Example
The following command displays the current backup and restore configuration:
show backupconfig
Hostname: 209.165.201.0
Username: user1
Related Commands
backup
backupconfig
listbackup
restore
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
B-50
78-14092-01
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
show bootlog
To display the messages logged during the last system boot, use the show bootlog
command.
show bootlog [page]
Syntax Description
page
Displays command output one screen at a time. Press the
return key to display the next output screen. Press Ctrl-c to
exit paged output and return to the command prompt.
Example
This command displays the messages logged during the last system boot:
show bootlog page
Linux/UID32 version 2.2.16-13bipsec.uid32 (gcc version egcs1
Console: colour VGA+ 80x25
Calibrating delay loop... 1133.77 BogoMIPS
start low memory: 0xc0001000 i386_endbase: 0xc009f000
addresses range:: 0xc0f00000 0xc1000000
start memory: c04f8000 end_memory: d0000000
Memory: 257688k/262144k available (988k kernel code, 416k reserved,
2992k data,)
Dentry hash table entries: 262144 (order 9, 2048k)
Buffer cache hash table entries: 262144 (order 8, 1024k)
Page cache hash table entries: 65536 (order 6, 256k)
vmdump: setting dump_execute() as dump_function_ptr ...
VFS: Diskquotas version dquot_6.4.0 initialized
CPU: Intel Pentium III (Coppermine) stepping 06
Checking 386/387 coupling... OK, FPU using exception 16 error
reporting.
Checking 'hlt' instruction... OK.
POSIX conformance testing by UNIFIX
mtrr: v1.35a (19990819) Richard Gooch (rgooch@atnf.csiro.au)
PCI: PCI BIOS revision 2.10 entry at 0xfda95
PCI: Using configuration type 1
-----------more-----------
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
B-51
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
Related Commands
reload
clock
show cdp neighbor
To display the WLSE’s nearest neighbor on the network, use the show cdp
neighbor command.
show cdp neighbor
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Example
This command shows the nearest neighbor on the network.
show cdp neighbor
cdp neighbor device: Switch
device type: cisco WS-C2924-XL
port: FastEthernet0/12
address: 209.165.201.0
show cdp run
To display the Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) configuration, use the show
cdp-run command.
show cdp run
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
B-52
78-14092-01
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
Example
This command displays the CDP configuration:
show cdp run
CDP protocol is enabled ...
broadcasting interval is every 60 seconds.
time-to-live of cdp packets is 180 seconds.
CDP is enabled on port eth0.
show collectorlog
To display the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s collector log, use the show
collectorlog command.
show collectorlog [page] | include matchstring1 [matchstring2]
Syntax Description
page
Displays command output one screen at a time. Press the
Return key to display the next output screen. Press Ctrl-c to
exit paged output and return to the command prompt.
include
Filters the command output to display only the records that
contain the specified string of characters.
matchstring1
String of characters to search for in the command output.
matchstring2
(Optional) Another string of characters to search for in the
command output.
Example
The following command displays the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s collector
log, one page at a time:
show collectorlog page
/var/adm/CSCOets/log/collector.log
2001/12/20 13:43:18 main HSECollector MESSAGE CollectorMain: Waiting
for databas
e to be ready
2001/12/20 13:43:21 main HSECollector MESSAGE CollectorMain: Database
is ready
SNMPThrPool: Instantiated ex.lib.snmp.lib.timer.DynamicThreadPool, mi
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
B-53
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
n=15, max=48, maxIdleSecs=0
2001/12/20 13:43:29 main HSECollector MESSAGE ServletServiceModule:
Moxie Servle
t Engine is ready to receive requests
2001/12/20 13:43:30 PeriodicSchedulerRun:FaultCleanup HSECollector
MESSAGE Colle
ctorDBUtils: DB.TableCleanupCommand=[VACUUM ]
2001/12/20 13:43:30 PeriodicSchedulerRun:FaultCleanup HSECollector
MESSAGE Colle
ctorDBUtils: DB.TableUpdateStatsCommand=[VACUUM ANALYZE ]
2001/12/21 10:39:52 Moxie Servlet Engine:Pooled Thread:1 HSECollector
MESSAGE Se
rvletContextAdaptor: Collector: init
show config
To display the system configuration, use the show config command.
show config
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Example
This command displays the system configuration:
show config
hostname ex1
interface ethernet0 209.165.201.0 255.255.255.224 default-gateway
209.165.202.128
interface ethernet1 down
interface ethernet2 down
interface ethernet3 down
interface ethernet4 down
interface ethernet5 down
ip domain-name embu-doc
ip name-server 209.165.202.158
username admin epassword ************* privilege 15
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
B-54
78-14092-01
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
show daemonslog
To display the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s daemons log, use the show
daemonslog command.
show daemonslog [page] | include matchstring1 [matchstring2]
Syntax Description
page
Displays command output one screen at a time. Press the
Return key to display the next output screen. Press Ctrl-c to
exit paged output and return to the command prompt.
include
Filters the command output to display only the records that
contain the specified string of characters.
matchstring1
String of characters to search for in the command output.
matchstring2
(Optional) Another string of characters to search for in the
command output.
Example
The following command displays the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s daemons
log, one page at a time:
show daemonslog page
/var/adm/CSCOets/log/daemons.log
[dmgrDbg] getenv(PX_DBG)=NULL
[dmgrDbg] getenv(PX_MY_DEBUG)=NULL
[dmgrDbg] getenv(PX_MY_TRACE)=NULL
[dmgrDbg] getenv(PX_DBG_LEVEL)=NULL
[dmgrDbg][Thu Dec 20 13:42:53 2001]##### INFO ##### re-evaluate
DbgLevel=0x0
++>>it(1) = 8077978 <HSECollector>
++>>it(1) = 8077898 <HSEANIServer>
++>>it(1) = 8077428 <PostgreSQL>
++>>it(1) = 8077228 <WebServer>
++>>it(1) = 8077328 <Tomcat>
++>>it(1) = 80770d8 <ExcepReporter>
++>>it(1) = 8076fc8 <CDPbrdcast>
++>>it(1) = 8076e58 <PerfMon>
#!/bin/sh -v
#!/bin/sh -v
if [ "$NMSROOT" = "" ]; then
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
B-55
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
NMSROOT=/opt/CSCOets
export NMSROOT
fi
cd $NMSROOT
--More--
show dmgtdlog
To display the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s daemon manager log, use the
show dmgtdlog command.
show dmgtdlog [page] | include matchstring1 [matchstring2]
Syntax Description
page
Displays command output one screen at a time. Press the
Return key to display the next output screen. Press Ctrl-c to
exit paged output and return to the command prompt.
include
Filters the command output to display only the records that
contain the specified string of characters.
matchstring1
String of characters to search for in the command output.
matchstring2
(Optional) Another string of characters to search for in the
command output.
Example
The following command displays the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s daemon
manager log, one page at a time:
show dmgtdlog page
/var/adm/CSCOets/log/dmgtd.log
Dec 20 13:42:56 ex dmgt[712]: #3001:TYPE=INFO:Using port: tcp/42340.
Dec 20 13:42:56 ex dmgt[714]: #3007:TYPE=INFO:Started application(HSEC
ollector) "/bin/nice -n 19 /opt/CSCOets/bin/collector" pid=715.
Dec 20 13:42:56 ex dmgt[714]: #3007:TYPE=INFO:Started application(HSEA
--More--
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
B-56
78-14092-01
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
show hseaccesslog
To display the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s Web access log, use the show
hseaccesslog command.
show hseaccesslog [page] | include matchstring1 [matchstring2]
Syntax Description
page
Displays command output one screen at a time. Press the
Return key to display the next output screen. Press Ctrl-c to
exit paged output and return to the command prompt.
include
Filters the command output to display only the records that
contain the specified string of characters.
matchstring1
String of characters to search for in the command output.
matchstring2
(Optional) Another string of characters to search for in the
command output.
Example
The following command displays the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s Web
access log, one page at a time:
show hseaccesslog page
/var/adm/CSCOets/log/access_log
209.165.200.224 - - [21/Dec/2001:10:38:54 +0000] "GET / HTTP/1.0" 302
276 "-" "Moz
illa/4.76 [en]C-CCK-MCD
(Windows NT 5.0; U)"
209.165.200.224 - - [21/Dec/2001:10:38:54 +0000] "GET
/perl/login-form.cgi HTTP/1.
0" 200 2268 "-" "Mozilla/4.76 [en]C-CCK-MCD
(Windows NT 5.0; U)"
209.165.200.224 - - [21/Dec/2001:10:38:55 +0000] "GET /icons/hse.gif
HTTP/1.0" 200
5554 "http://209.165.201.0:1741/perl/login-form.cgi" "Mozilla/4.76
[en]C-CCK-MC
D
(Windows NT 5.0; U)"
209.165.200.224 - - [21/Dec/2001:10:38:55 +0000] "GET
/icons/left_top.gif HTTP/1.0
" 200 324 "http://209.165.201.0:1741/perl/login-form.cgi"
"Mozilla/4.76 [en]C-CC
K-MCD
(Windows NT 5.0; U)"
--More--
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
B-57
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
show hseerrorlog
To display the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s Web error log, use the show
hseerrorlog command.
show hseerrorlog [page] | include matchstring1 [matchstring2]
Syntax Description
page
Displays command output one screen at a time. Press the
Return key to display the next output screen. Press Ctrl-c to
exit paged output and return to the command prompt.
include
Filters the command output to display only the records that
contain the specified string of characters.
matchstring1
String of characters to search for in the command output.
matchstring2
(Optional) Another string of characters to search for in the
command output.
Example
The following command displays the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s Web error
log, one page at a time:
show hseerrorlog page
/var/adm/CSCOets/log/error_log
[Thu Dec 20 13:43:00 2001] [error] (22)Invalid argument: <Perl>:
Invalid command
'secret', perhaps mis-spelled or defined by a module not included in
the server
configuration
[Thu Dec 20 13:43:00 2001] [error] (22)Invalid argument: <Perl>:
Invalid command
'line', perhaps mis-spelled or defined by a module not included in
the server c
onfiguration
[Thu Dec 20 13:43:00 2001] [error] (22)Invalid argument: <Perl>:
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
B-58
78-14092-01
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
show hsesslaccesslog
To display the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s Web SSL log, use the show
hsesslaccesslog command.
show hsesslaccesslog [page] | include matchstring1 [matchstring2]
Syntax Description
page
Displays command output one screen at a time. Press the
Return key to display the next output screen. Press Ctrl-c to
exit paged output and return to the command prompt.
include
Filters the command output to display only the records that
contain the specified string of characters.
matchstring1
String of characters to search for in the command output.
matchstring2
(Optional) Another string of characters to search for in the
command output.
Example
The following command displays the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s Web SSL
log, one page at a time:
show hsesslaccesslog page
show import
To display an imported host file, use the show import command.
show import hosts
Syntax Description
hosts
Name of server that host files were imported from.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
B-59
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
Example
This command displays the imported host file
show import ftpserver_1
show install logs
To display the software updates and images available on the configured
repository, use the show install logs command.
show install logs [short | long] [page]
Syntax Description
short
Displays only the names of software updates and images on
the configured repository
long
Displays the names and descriptions of software updates and
images on the configured repository.
page
Displays command output one screen at a time.
Example
The following command displays the software updates and images available on
the configured browser, one screen at a time:
show install updates page
2
NAME=EX-2.0a
show ipchains
To display the IP chains for the selected interface, use the show ipchains
command.
show ipchains eth<0-5>
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
B-60
78-14092-01
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
Syntax Description
eth<0-5>
Name of the interface port to be configured. Acceptable
values are eth0-5.
Example
The following command displays the IP chains for the ethernet 0 interface:
show ipchains eth0
Chain ineth0 (1 references):
target
prot opt
source
ports
ACCEPT
tcp -y--l- anywhere
ACCEPT
tcp ------ anywhere
ACCEPT
tcp ------ anywhere
ACCEPT
tcp -y--l- anywhere
destination
ex.help
ex.help
ex.help
ex.help
any
any
any
any
->
->
->
->
telt
telt
3345
ssh
show hosts
To display your Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s host file, use the show hosts
command.
show hosts [page]
Syntax Description
page
Displays command output one screen at a time.
Example
The following command displays your Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s host file
one page at a time:
show hosts page
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
B-61
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
show maillog
To display the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s mail log, use the show maillog
command.
show maillog [page] | include matchstring1 [matchstring2]
Syntax Description
page
Displays command output one screen at a time. Press the
Return key to display the next output screen. Press Ctrl-c to
exit paged output and return to the command prompt.
include
Filters the command output to display only the records that
contain the specified string of characters.
matchstring1
String of characters to search for in the command output.
matchstring2
(Optional) Another string of characters to search for in the
command output.
Example
The following command displays the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s collector
log, one page at a time:
show maillog page
/var/log/maillog
Dec 21 04:02:06 ex sendmail[11643]: EAA11643: from=root, size=307, cla
ss=0, pri=30307, nrcpts=1, msgid=<200112210402.EAA11643@ex.help>, rela
y=root@localhost
Dec 21 04:02:06 ex sendmail[11660]: EAA11643: SYSERR(root): Cannot exe
c /usr/bin/procmail: No such file or directory
Dec 21 04:02:06 ex sendmail[11643]: EAA11643: to=root, ctladdr=root (0
/0), delay=00:00:06, xdelay=00:00:00, mailer=local, stat=Operating
system error
show proc
To display the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s active process statistics, use the
show proc command.
show proc [page]
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
B-62
78-14092-01
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
Syntax Description
page
Displays command output one screen at a time.
Example
The following command displays the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s active
process statistics one page at a time:
show proc page
PID
ELAPSED
SZ
1
22:29:10
277 Thu
2
22:29:10
0 Thu
3
22:29:10
0 Thu
4
22:29:10
0 Thu
5
22:29:10
0 Thu
6
22:29:03
0 Thu
85
22:29:00
0 Thu
86
22:29:00
0 Thu
87
22:28:59
0 Thu
88
22:28:59
0 Thu
89
22:28:59
0 Thu
208
22:28:57
290 Thu
322
22:28:51
342 Thu
510
22:28:51
290 Thu
519
22:28:50
361 Thu
637
22:28:48
327 Thu
651
22:28:48
286 Thu
17076
18:23
364 Fri
17077
18:23
575 Fri
-----------more-----------
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
21
21
STARTED TTY
13:42:29 2001 ?
13:42:29 2001 ?
13:42:29 2001 ?
13:42:29 2001 ?
13:42:29 2001 ?
13:42:36 2001 ?
13:42:39 2001 ?
13:42:39 2001 ?
13:42:40 2001 ?
13:42:40 2001 ?
13:42:40 2001 ?
13:42:42 2001 ?
13:42:48 2001 ?
13:42:48 2001 ?
13:42:49 2001 ?
13:42:51 2001 ?
13:42:51 2001 ?
11:53:16 2001 ?
11:53:16 2001 0
COMMAND
init
kflushd
kupdate
kpiod
kswapd
kreiserfsd
kreiserfsd
kreiserfsd
kreiserfsd
kreiserfsd
kreiserfsd
watchdog
idled
syslogd
klogd
crond
inetd
\_ in.telnetd
|
\_ login
show repository
To display the status or the access log of a configured repository, use the show
repository command.
show repository {status | access-log} [page]
Syntax Description
status
Displays the status of the local repository
access-log
Displays the access-log of the local repository
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
B-63
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
page
Displays command output one screen at a time.
Example
This command displays the status of the configured repository:
show repository status
Repository Source: 171.69.212.146:9851
repository is running.
show route
To display the routes currently configured, use the show route command.
show route
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Example
This command displays the currently configured routes
show route
Destination
209.165.200.224
209.165.200.225
209.165.200.254
209.165.202.128
Gateway
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Genmask
255.255.255.224
255.255.255.224
255.255.255.224
255.255.255.224
Flags
UH
U
U
UG
Metric
0
0
0
0
Ref
0
0
0
0
Use
0
0
0
0
Iface
eth0
eth0
lo
eth0
show securitylog
To display the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s security log information, use the
show securitylog command.
show securitylog [page] | include matchstring1 [matchstring2]
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
B-64
78-14092-01
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
Syntax Description
page
Displays command output one screen at a time. Press the
Return key to display the next output screen. Press Ctrl-c to
exit paged output and return to the command prompt.
include
Filters the command output to display only the records that
contain the specified string of characters.
matchstring1
String of characters to search for in the command output.
matchstring2
(Optional) Another string of characters to search for in the
command output.
Example
The following command displays the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s security
log, one page at a time:
show securitylog page
/var/log/secure
Dec 20 13:45:23 ex in.tftpd[1381]:
Dec 20 13:45:27 ex in.tftpd[1383]:
Dec 20 13:45:31 ex in.tftpd[1385]:
Dec 20 13:45:35 ex in.tftpd[1387]:
Dec 20 13:45:39 ex in.tftpd[1389]:
Dec 20 13:45:44 ex in.tftpd[1391]:
Dec 20 13:45:48 ex in.tftpd[1393]:
Dec 20 13:45:52 ex in.tftpd[1395]:
Dec 20 13:45:56 ex in.tftpd[1397]:
Dec 20 13:46:00 ex in.tftpd[1399]:
Dec 20 13:46:04 ex in.tftpd[1412]:
Dec 20 13:46:27 ex in.tftpd[1424]:
Dec 20 13:46:31 ex in.tftpd[1426]:
Dec 20 13:46:35 ex in.tftpd[1428]:
Dec 20 13:46:39 ex in.tftpd[1430]:
Dec 20 13:46:43 ex in.tftpd[1432]:
Dec 20 13:46:47 ex in.tftpd[1434]:
--More--
connect
connect
connect
connect
connect
connect
connect
connect
connect
connect
connect
connect
connect
connect
connect
connect
connect
from
from
from
from
from
from
from
from
from
from
from
from
from
from
from
from
from
209.165.200.224
209.165.200.224
209.165.200.224
209.165.200.224
209.165.200.224
209.165.200.224
209.165.200.224
209.165.200.224
209.165.200.224
209.165.200.224
209.165.200.224
209.165.200.224
209.165.200.224
209.165.200.224
209.165.200.224
209.165.200.224
209.165.200.224
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
B-65
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
show snmp-server
To display the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s SNMP configuration, use the
show snmp-server command.
show snmp-server
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Example
The following command displays the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s SNMP
configuration:
show snmp-server
RW community string: private
RO community string: public
sysLocation: your site information
sysContact: your contact information
trap-forwarding is disabled
show ssh-version
To display the type of SSH enabled, use the ssh-version command.
show ssh-version
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Example
This command displays the type of SSH that is enabled:
show ssh-version
SSH1, SSH2
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
B-66
78-14092-01
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
show syslog
To display syslog information, use the show syslog command.
show syslog [page] [include matchstring1 [matchstring2]]
Syntax Description
page
Displays command output one screen at a time. Press the
Return key to display the next output screen. Press Ctrl-c to
exit paged output and return to the command prompt.
include
Filters the command output to display only the records that
contain the specified string of characters.
matchstring1
String of characters to search for in the command output.
matchstring2
(Optional) Another string of characters to search for in the
command output.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to display syslog information.
To filter the command output to include only the records that contain the specified
string(s) of characters, use the include option with one or two character strings to
search for. If you include two strings, the command outputs only those records
that contain both character strings.
Example
This command displays syslog information:
show syslog
Jun 20 16:04:23 ex syslogd
Jun 20 16:04:23 ex syslog:
Jun 20 16:04:23 ex kernel:
Jun 20 16:04:23 ex kernel:
Jun 20 16:04:23 ex syslog:
-----------more-----------
1.3-3: restart.
syslogd startup succeeded
klogd 1.3-3, log source = /proc/kmsg start.
Inspecting /boot/System.map-2.2.16-13bipse2
klogd startup succeeded
Related Command
interface
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
B-67
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
show tech
To display information necessary for Cisco’s Technical Assistance Center to
assist you, use the show tech command.
show tech [page]
Syntax Description
page
Displays command output one screen at a time. Press the
Return key to display the next output screen. Press Ctrl-c to
exit paged output and return to the command prompt.
Example
This command displays system information necessary for Cisco’s Technical
Assistance Center to assist you.
show tech page
/bin/cat: /var/log/secure: Permission denied
Copyright (c) 1999-2000 by Cisco Systems, Inc.
Build Version (166) Mon Jun 11 16:56:23 PDT 2001
Linux/UID32 version 2.2.16-13bipsec.uid32 (gcc version egcs1
Uptime: 0 days 18 hours 35 mins
2 Ethernet interfaces
hostname ex
interface ethernet0 209.165.200.224 255.255.255.224 default-gateway
209.165.202.128
ip name-server 209.165.201.0
username admin epassword ************* privilege 15
eth0
Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:02:B3:35:FD:CC
inet addr:209.165.200.224 Bcast:209.165.201.31
Mask:255.255.255.224
-----------more-----------
show telnetenable
To display the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s Telnet status, use the show
telnetenable command.
show telnetenable
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
B-68
78-14092-01
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Example
The following command shows if Telnet is enabled or disabled:
show telnetenable
telnet enable for: ALL
show tomcatlog
To display the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s Tomcat log, use the show
tomcatlog command.
show tomcatlog [page] | include matchstring1 [matchstring2]
Syntax Description
page
Displays command output one screen at a time. Press the
Return key to display the next output screen. Press Ctrl-c to
exit paged output and return to the command prompt.
include
Filters the command output to display only the records that
contain the specified string of characters.
matchstring1
String of characters to search for in the command output.
matchstring2
(Optional) Another string of characters to search for in the
command output.
Example
The following command displays the Wireless LAN Solution Engine’s tomcat
log, one page at a time:
show tomcatlog page
/var/adm/CSCOets/log/tomcat.log
2001-12-20 01:43:06 - ContextManager: Adding context Ctx( /examples )
2001-12-20 01:43:06 - ContextManager: Adding context Ctx( /admin )
Starting tomcat. Check logs/tomcat.log for error messages
2001-12-20 01:43:06 - ContextManager: Adding context Ctx( )
getUIProperties(): unhandled error could be a bad ui.properties
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
B-69
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
java.lang.NullPointerException
at java.io.Reader.<init>(Reader.java:68)
at java.io.InputStreamReader.<init>(InputStreamReader.java:96)
--More--
shutdown
To shut down the system in preparation for powering it off, use the shutdown
command.
shutdown
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to shut down the WLSE in preparation for powering it off. All
processes running on the WLSE will stop, and it will not respond until you power
it off and back on.
You are prompted to verify the shutdown. Enter yes to continue, or no to cancel
the shutdown.
Caution
Never power the system off without running the shutdown command first.
Doing so can destroy data and prevent the system from booting.
Example
This command shuts down the system:
shutdown
Related Commands
reload
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
B-70
78-14092-01
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
snmp-server
To configure an simple network management protocol (SNMP) agent, use the
snmp-server command.
snmp-server {community community-name [RO|RW] | location
sysLocation-info | contact sysContact-info}
no snmp-server {community community-name | location | contact}
Syntax Description
community
sets the community strings that permit access to the SNMP.
community-name
the community name string.
RO
read only.
RW
read / write.
location
sets the system location string.
sysLocation-info
the location string.
contact
sets the contact string.
sysContact-info
the contact string.
Example
This command sets an SNMP contact string:
snmp-server contact Dial System Operator at Beeper # 27345
ssh
To use SSH to connect to an external host, use the ssh command.
ssh [options] host [command]
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
B-71
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
Syntax Description
options
Standard SSH options. For a list of these options, enter the
ssh command without any arguments.
host
Name or IP address of host to which to connect.
command
Command for the external host to execute.
Example
Enter the following command to connect to an external host using SSH:
ssh 209.165.200.224
ssh-version
Use the ssh-version command to enable Secure Shell (SSH) 1, SSH 2, or both
SSH 1 and SSH 2.
ssh-version {ssh1 | ssh2 | both}
Syntax Description
ssh1
Enables SSH 1
ssh2
Enables SSH 2
both
Enables both SSH 1 and SSH2
Example
This command enables ssh1:
ssh-version ssh1
telnet
To Telnet to an external host, use the telnet command.
telnet {hostname | ip-address} [portnumber]
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
B-72
78-14092-01
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
Syntax Description
hostname
Hostname of the external device.
ip-address
IP address of the external device.
portnumber
portnumber of the external device.
Example
Enter the following command to telnet to port 9851 of a system with the IP
address 209.165.200.224:
telnet 209.165.200.224 9851
telnetenable
To configure Telnet access, use the telnetenable command.
telnetenable {enable [ip-addresses | domains] | disable | status}
Syntax Description
enable
Enables Telnet access to the system.
disable
Disables Telnet access to the system.
status
Displays current access status.
ip-addresses
IP addresses of systems allowed Telnet access. If this
argument is used, no other machines will be allowed access.
Multiple IP address are allowed.
domains
Domains of systems allowed Telnet access. If this argument
is used, machines with domains other than the specified
domain will be denied Telnet access. Multiple domains are
allowed.
Default
The default is disable.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
B-73
Appendix B
Command Reference
Privilege Level 15 Commands
Usage Guidelines
To enable Telnet access to the system for all IP source addresses, use the
telnetenable enable command alone. To enable specific IP addresses, use the
telnetenable enable command followed by the IP addresses.
Example
This command enables Telnet for all IP source addresses:
telnetenable enable
username
To create a new user account or change an account’s properties, use the username
command. Use the no form of the command to remove a user account.
username name password password [privilege {0 | 15}]
no username name
Syntax Description
name
Name of the user account to create or remove.
password
Specifies a password for the account.
password
The password for the account.
privilege
(Optional) Specifies the account privilege level.
0
Gives the account level 0 privileges. This is the default.
15
Gives the account level 15 privileges.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
B-74
78-14092-01
Appendix B
Command Reference
Maintenance Image Commands
Usage Guidelines
Use the username command to change the properties of a user account. To assign
a user CLI privilege level 15, use the username command. You cannot assign CLI
privilege level 15 through the Web interface. Use the no form of the command to
remove a user account. The default privilege level is 0 if you do not provide the
privilege option.
For more information about managing user accounts and privilege levels, refer to
Administering Users, page 5-60.
Example
This command creates a user account named user1 with password password1 and
privilege level 15:
username user1 password password1 privilege 15
This command removes the user account:
no username user1
Maintenance Image Commands
This section describes the commands that are available when the system is booted
from the maintenance image. For more information about the maintenance image,
refer to the Installation and Configuration Guide for the Cisco 1105 Wireless
LAN Solution Engine.
erase config
This command is identical to the level 15 erase config command. For a
description, see the “erase config” section on page B-22.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
B-75
Appendix B
Command Reference
Maintenance Image Commands
fsck
To check and repair the filesystem, use the fsck command.
fsck
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Usage Guidelines
Use the fsck command to check and repair the filesystem. The command might
prompt you for confirmation before making certain repairs.
Example
The following command checks and repairs the filesystem:
fsck
reload
This command is identical to the level 15 reload command. For a description, see
“reload” section on page B-39.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
B-76
78-14092-01
G L O S S ARY
A
access point
Access points are wireless LAN transceivers that serve as the center point of a
standalone wireless network or as the connection point between wireless and
wired networks. In large installations, wireless users within radio range of an
access point can roam throughout a facility while maintaining seamless,
uninterrupted access to the network.
B
bridge
See wireless bridge.
C
CDP distance
The CDP distance determines the depth of the discovery and applies to all seed
devices. If CDP distance is 1, only the immediate neighbors of the seed device
are discovered. If CDP distance is 2, devices A and B that are directly connected
to the seed devices are discovered and the immediate neighbors of A and B are
also discovered.
CLI
The command line interface for administering the WLSE. You use the CLI
through a console attached to the WLSE’s console port or by opening a Telnet
connection to the WLSE. CLI commands are described in the User Guide for the
CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
GL-1
Glossary
community strings
Text strings that act as passwords to authenticate communication with devices
that contain an SNMP agent.
E
EAP server
Servers running extensible authentication protocol to provide dynamic,
session-specific wireless encryption keys, central user administration. and
authentication between clients and access points.
See also LEAP server.
exception
A group of related faults.
L
LEAP server
Light EAP server used by the Wireless LAN Solution Engine to combine
centralized two-way authentication with dynamically generated wireless
equivalent privacy keys or WEP keys.
See also EAP server.
N
nslookup
The NSLookup tool is used to look up device or host information via the name
server. You must enter a device name, not an IP address, to use this function.
You must have a DNS server in order to look up network servers.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
GL-2
78-14092-01
Glossary
P
ping
A common method for troubleshooting the accessibility of devices.
A ping tests an ICMP echo message and its reply. Because ping is the simplest
test for a device, it is the first to be used. If ping fails, try using traceroute.
Run ping to view the packets transmitted, packets received, percentage of packet
loss, and round-trip time in milliseconds.
R
repository
The Repository provides software update services to the Solution Engine. You
can download software from the Repository and install it on the Solution Engine,
and you can browse the available software versions on the Repository.
S
seed
A CDP-enabled device used as a starting point for discovery. For example, by
adding a seed device (or set of seed devices), the neighbors of the seed device
are discovered using CDP.
SSID
Service Set ID. It is a unique identifier that client devices use to associate with
the access point. The SSID helps client devices distinguish between multiple
wireless networks in the same vicinity. The SSID can be any alphanumeric entry
up to 32 characters long.
SSL
Secure Socket Layer. Proves a secure connection between the WLSE and Web
clients.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
GL-3
Glossary
T
threshold
A range within which you expect your network to perform. If a threshold is
exceeded or goes below the expected bounds, you examine the areas for
potential problems. You can create thresholds for a specific device.
traceroute
This is a diagnostic tool that helps you understand why ping fails or why
applications time out. Using it, can view each hop (or gateway) on the route to
your device and how long each took.
U
Coordinated Universal Time. Time zone at zero degrees longitude. Formerly
called Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) and Zulu time.
UTC
W
WEP keys
Wired equivalent privacy (WEP) keys are the IEEE 802.11b standard that offers
a mechanism for securing wireless LAN data streams. The goals of WEP include
access control to prevent unauthorized users who lack a correct WEP key from
gaining access to the network, and privacy to protect wireless LAN data streams
by encrypting them and allowing de-encryption only by users with the correct
WEP keys.
wireless bridge
Designed to connect two or more networks (typically located in different
buildings). Bridges connect hard-to-wire sites, noncontiguous floors, satellite
offices, school or corporate campus settings, temporary networks, and
warehouses. For functional flexibility, the wireless bridge may also be
configured as an access point.
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
GL-4
78-14092-01
I N D EX
system-defined groups for 5-28
A
template, creating 3-90
access point
Aggregation Interval, setting 5-58
AP and Bridge Connected to Router report,
displaying 4-20
Aggregation Truncation Interval, setting 5-58
AP and Bridge Connected to Switch report,
displaying 4-18
audience for this document xi
ANI log, displaying B-48
auth command B-16
configuring 3-1
authentication
current client association report,
displaying 4-15
displaying B-49
definition 1
enabling B-16
detailed report, displaying 4-13
modules supported 5-46
Ethernet transmission statistics,
displaying 4-25
overview 5-46
setting up 5-47
faults, displaying 2-2
fault thresholds, setting 2-8
B
group report, displaying 4-7
group security report, displaying 4-9
HTTP username and password,
specifying 5-20
backup procedure 5-51, B-17
backups, listing B-33
limitation on number of 5-14
configuring backup 5-50, B-18, B-50
performance graph, displaying 4-26
restore procedure 5-52
performance table, displaying 4-27
backup command B-17
policies, specifying 2-12
RF transmission statistics, displaying 4-24
setting up 5-4
summary report, displaying 4-11
backing up and restoring data
backupconfig command B-18
booting, WLSE 5-36, B-39, B-51
bridge
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
IN-1
Index
AP and Bridge Connected to Router report,
displaying 4-20
CDP (Cisco Discovery Protocol)
AP and Bridge Connected to Switch report,
displaying 4-18
neighbors, displaying B-52
configuring 3-1
current client association report,
displaying 4-15
configuring B-19, B-52
use in discovery 5-3
cdp command B-19
CDP distance
definition 1
definition of 1
detailed report, displaying 4-13
setting 5-10
Ethernet transmission statistics 4-25
Ethernet transmission statistics,
displaying 4-25
group report, displaying 4-7
group security report, displaying 4-9
limitation on number of 5-14
performance graph, displaying 4-26
RF transmission statistics, displaying 4-24
setting up 5-4
template, creating 3-90
CD-ROM, obtaining Cisco documentation
on xiv
character set, allowable A-1
Cisco.com, obtaining technical assistance
through xv
CiscoWorks2000
exporting devices to 5-24
importing devices from 5-23
CLI
access, configuring 5-62
commands B-1 to B-76
browser
date and time display 1-2
definition 1
using B-2
client
C
current association report, displaying 4-15
detail report, displaying 4-2
cautions
erase config command B-23
losing data by clicking between subtabs 3-93
reload command B-39
shutdown command, failure to run B-70
significance of xii
historical association report, displaying 4-5
statistics report, displaying 4-3
clock command B-20
collector log, displaying B-53
command reference B-1 to B-76
CLI conventions B-2
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
IN-2
78-14092-01
Index
command history feature B-3
ip domain-name B-31
command privileges B-2
ip name-server B-32
command summary (table) B-4 to B-9
listbackup B-33
help for B-3
mail B-34
maintenance image commands B-75 to B-76
mailcntrl clear B-34
erase config B-75
mailcntrl list B-35
fsck B-76
mailroute B-36
reload B-76
nslookup B-36
Privilege Level 0 commands B-10 to B-16
ntp server B-37
exit B-10
reload B-39
ping B-10
restore B-45
show clock B-11
route B-46
show domain-name B-12
services B-46
show interfaces B-13
show auth-cli B-49
show process B-13
show auth-http B-49
show version B-14
show backupconfig B-50
traceroute B-15
show bootlog B-51
Privilege Level 15 commands B-16 to B-75
show cdp-neighbor B-52
auth B-16
show cdp-run B-52
backup B-17
show config B-54
backupconfig B-18
show import B-59
cdp B-19
show route B-64
clock B-20
show ssh-version B-66
erase config B-22
show syslog B-67
firewall B-23
show tech B-68
gethostbyname B-24
shutdown B-70
hostname B-25
snmp-server B-71
import B-25
ssh-version B-72
interface B-29
telnetenable B-73
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
IN-3
Index
username B-74
switch summary 4-17
syntax, checking B-2 to B-3
typographical conventions B-9
community strings
D
definition 1
daemon log, displaying 5-35
requirement for 5-18
daemon manager log, displaying 5-35, B-56
setting on devices 5-4
data
specifying 5-18
configuring devices
backing up 5-50
restoring 5-50
configuration jobs 3-92
database, reinitializing B-40
devices, setting up for discovery 5-4
date and time
templates, using 3-1
displaying B-11
troubleshooting 7-2
in WLSE displays 1-2
connectivity, testing 5-66
setting B-20
conventions
synchronizing to a time server B-37
CLI B-2
deleting
in command descriptions B-9
devices 5-13
credentials 5-17
groups 5-33
current reports, displaying 4-6
users 5-65, B-74
AP and Bridge Connected to Router
report 4-20
detailed report, displaying 4-13
AP and Bridge Connected to Switch
report 4-18
Device History option 5-16
current client association 4-15
detailed 4-13
EAP authentication 4-16
Device Credentials option 5-17
devices
configuring
configuration jobs 3-93
setting up for discovery 5-4
group 4-7
group security 4-9
router summary 4-19
summary 4-11
templates 3-1
troubleshooting 7-2
connectivity, testing 5-66
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
IN-4
78-14092-01
Index
credentials, setting 5-17
status and history 5-12
deleting 5-13
troubleshooting 7-10
details, viewing 5-13
verifying 5-12
exporting to CiscoWorks2000 5-24
Discovery History option 5-12
grouping 5-28
disk usage, viewing B-21
importing
DNS
from CiscoWorks2000 5-23
lookup, specifying 5-18
from file 5-22
name servers, specifying B-32
limitation on number of wireless
devices 5-14
documentation
management history 5-16
feedback, providing electronically or by
mail xiv
managing 5-13
obtaining xiii
newly discovered 5-13
on a CD-ROM xiv
setting up 5-4
on the World Wide Web xiii
unmanaged 5-13
ordering xiv
diagnostics, WLSE
processes, viewing 5-56
related xii to xiii
domain name
self-test 5-53
default, defining B-31
status reports 5-53
displaying B-12
discovery
CDP protocol 5-3
device setup for 5-4
enabling 5-10
E
EAP server
immediate 5-11
authentication report, displaying 4-16
importing devices 5-21
definition 2
newly discovered devices 5-13
email
one-time 5-11
emailing a report 4-28
options 5-2
forwarding B-36
overview 5-3
forwarding faults 2-18
seed devices 5-10
logs and queues B-34, B-62
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
IN-5
Index
scheduling 4-29
getting started with WLSE 1-1
testing and debugging B-34
group performance report
troubleshooting 7-7
erase config command B-22, B-75
number of associations 4-23
RF throughput 4-22
exception, definition 2
group report, displaying 4-7
exit command B-10
groups
exporting devices 5-24
creating 5-30
deleting 5-30
editing 5-30
F
group security report, displaying 4-9
Fault History Truncation Interval, setting 5-58
overview 5-28
faults
report, displaying 4-7
displaying 2-1
exception, definition of 2
system-defined 5-28
group security report, displaying 4-9
faults log, displaying 5-35
forwarding 2-15
emailing faults 2-18
syslog notifications 2-17
H
help
trap notification 2-16
CLI, displaying B-3
troubleshooting email 7-2
online xiii
parameters for fault reporting 5-58
thresholds, specifying 2-7
firewall command B-23
forwarding, faults 2-15
fsck command B-76
technical assistance, obtaining xv
Cisco.com xv
TAC xv
host file
displaying B-59, B-61
importing B-25
hostname
G
changing system hostname B-25
gethostbyname command B-24
translating to IP addresses B-36
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
IN-6
78-14092-01
Index
hostname command B-25
J
HTTP
jobs
setting on access points 5-4
creating 3-99
username and password for access points,
specifying 5-20
deleting 3-103
HTTPS
editing 3-102
certificate, obtaining 5-48
filtering 3-102
log, viewing 5-35
log, displaying 5-35
managing 3-92
naming guidelines A-1
I
scheduling email jobs 4-29
import command B-25
troubleshooting 7-2
importing devices 5-21
undoing 3-103
installing software updates 5-41, B-28, B-29, B-60
viewing status 3-99
interface command B-29
inventory
immediate inventory, running 5-17
L
resetting the polling interval 5-58
LEAP server
Inventory Performance Attributes Polling
Interval, setting 5-58
Inventory Polling Interval, setting 5-58
IP addresses
displaying B-24
translating to hostnames B-36
IP chains, displaying B-60
ip domain-name command B-31
ip name-server command B-32
adding 5-26
definition 2
EAP authentication report, displaying 4-16
modifying 5-27
removing 5-28
setting response time 2-12
setting up 5-9
listbackup command B-33
logging in
splash screen, adding a message 5-57
to WLSE 1-3
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
IN-7
Index
logging out
N
CLI command for B-10
from the WLSE 1-4
logs, displaying
collector log B-53
name servers, specifying B-32
naming guidelines A-1
network
daemon manager log 5-35, B-56
connectivity testing 5-66
daemons log 5-35, B-55
setting up 5-4
install logs B-60
network interfaces
syslog B-67
configuring B-29
system log 5-57
displaying B-13
Tomcat log 5-35, B-69
IP chains, displaying B-60
View Log File option 5-35
nslookup
Web access log 5-35, B-57
definition 2
Web error log 5-35, B-58
NSlookup tool 5-66
Web SSL access log B-59
nslookup command B-36
NTP (Network Time Protocol),
configuring B-37
M
ntp server command B-37
MAC address, displaying B-13
mailcntrl clear command B-34
P
mailcntrl list command B-35
mail command B-34
mailroute command B-36
maintenance image, CLI commands for B-75
Manage/Unmanage option 5-13
Managed Devices option 5-13
Manage Roles option 5-60
Manage Users option 5-62
parameters, system 5-58
passwords
changing your password 5-65
HTTP 5-20
LEAP server 5-26
WLSE users 5-62
performance graph, displaying for access points
and bridges 4-26
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
IN-8
78-14092-01
Index
performance table, displaying for access points
and bridges 4-27
ping
command B-10
definition 3
Ping tool 5-66
policies, specifying 2-13
port filtering, configuring B-23
processes, displaying 5-54, B-13, B-62
remote 5-40, B-27
definition 3
listing images and updates B-28, B-43
local
deleting software from B-42
status B-44
transferring software to B-41
status, displaying B-63
restarting (rebooting) WLSE 5-36, B-51
Restart option 5-36
restore command B-45
R
restoring data from backups 5-50, B-45
radio, configuring 3-36
reader comment form, submitting
electronically xiv
rebooting, WLSE 5-36, B-39
reload command
maintenance image command B-76
Privilege Level 15 command B-39
reports
current, displaying 4-6
parameters for 5-58
scheduling email 4-29
trends, displaying 4-21
troubleshooting 7-7
wireless client, displaying 4-1
repository
browsing 5-43
roles
creating and modifying 5-60
deleting 5-60
naming guidelines A-1
predefined 5-60
route command B-46
router
AP and Bridge Connected to, displaying 4-20
setting up 5-7
summary report, displaying 4-19
system-defined group for 5-28
routes
adding B-46
displaying B-15, B-64
Run Discovery Now option 5-11
creating
local 5-39, B-40
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
IN-9
Index
show config command B-54
S
show domain-name command B-12
scheduling
show import command B-59
discovery 5-10
show interfaces command B-13
email 4-29
show process command B-13
jobs 3-93
show route command B-64
security
show ssh-version command B-66
authentication
show syslog command B-67
enabling B-16
show tech command B-68
modules 5-46
show version command B-14
HTTPS 5-48
shutdown command B-70
last 10 logged in users, viewing 5-49
SNMP
log, displaying B-64
agent, configuring B-71
SSH 5-49
agent log, displaying 5-35
SSL 5-48
community strings
Telnet, enabling or disabling 5-49
seed
guidelines for 5-20
specifying 5-18
adding seeds 5-10
configuration, displaying B-66
definition 3
trap notification, setting 2-16
services, managing B-46
snmp-server command B-71
services command B-46
software, on devices
Short Term Trending Inventory Truncation
Interval, setting 5-58
show auth-cli command B-49
show auth-http B-49
show backupconfig command B-50
show bootlog command B-51
show cdp-neighbor B-52
show cdp-run command B-52
groups for 5-28
software, on WLSE
browsing the repository 5-43
data, backing up and restoring 5-50
installation log, displaying 5-35
local repository, creating 5-39
maintenance image B-75
managing 5-37
show clock command B-11
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
IN-10
78-14092-01
Index
overview 5-37
syslog
remote repository, creating 5-40
displaying B-67
status, viewing 5-37
notification, setting 2-17
updates
system
history, viewing 5-44
configuration
installing 5-41, B-29
displaying B-54
transferring to WLSE B-41
erasing B-22
version, viewing B-14
hostname, changing B-25
splash screen, adding a message 5-57
shutdown B-70
SSH
storage usage, displaying B-22
enabling 5-49, B-72
system log, using 5-57
type, displaying B-66
system parameters, setting 5-58
ssh-version command B-72
SSID
T
definition 3
system-defined groups for 5-28
TAC (Technical Assistance Center)
SSL
information for, displaying B-68
certificate, obtaining 5-48
obtaining support from xv
definition 3
how the Escalation Center works xvii
log, displaying 5-35
priority levels, understanding xvi
managing 5-48
telephone numbers xvii
subnet, system-defined group for 5-28
website xvi
summary report, displaying 4-11
TCP Port Scan tool 5-66
switch
Technical Assistance Center (see TAC) xv
fault thresholds, setting 2-10
technical support xv
setting up 5-7
through Cisco.com xv
summary report, displaying 4-17
through TAC xv
system-defined group for 5-28
syntax of commands, checking B-2 to B-3
telephone numbers for TAC (see technical
support) xvii
Telnet
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
IN-11
Index
disabling B-73
AP and bridge performance graph 4-26
enabling 5-49, B-73
AP and bridge RF transmission statistics 4-24
SSH 5-49
group performance report, number of
associations 4-23
status, displaying B-68
telnetenable command B-73
templates
group performance report, RF
throughput 4-22
troubleshooting 7-1
copying 3-91
creating 3-90
deleting 3-92
editing 3-91
troubleshooting 7-2
using 3-1
configuration 7-2
device management 7-9
discovery 7-9
reports 7-7
users 7-9
typographical conventions
threshold
in command descriptions B-9
definition 4
used in this document xi to xii
specifying fault 2-7
time
display on WLSE 1-2
system time 1-2
UTC, definition 4
Tomcat log, displaying 5-35, B-69
traceroute
command B-15
definition 4
Traceroute tool 5-66
transmission statistics
displaying Ethernet for AP and bridge 4-25
displaying RF for AP and bridge 4-24
trends, displaying 4-21
AP and bridge Ethernet transmission
statistics 4-25
U
undoing a job 3-103
unmanaged devices 5-13
updates, installing 5-41
user-defined
groups 5-29
roles 5-60
username command B-74
users
CLI access 5-62
creating 5-62, B-74
deleting 5-65, B-74
last 10 logged in users. viewing 5-49
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
IN-12
78-14092-01
Index
modifying 5-62
naming guidelines A-1
password, changing 5-65
removing 5-62
roles
assigning to users 5-62
managing 5-60
troubleshooting 7-9
UTC
definition 4
on WLSE 1-2
W
Web access log, displaying 5-35, B-57
Web error log, displaying 5-35, B-58
Web SSL log, displaying B-59
WEP keys, definition 4
Wireless Client Polling, setting 5-58
wireless client reports, displaying 4-1
client detail 4-2
client historical association 4-5
client statistics 4-3
World Wide Web
contacting TAC via xvi
obtaining Cisco documentation via xiii
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
78-14092-01
IN-13
Index
User Guide for the CiscoWorks 1105 Wireless LAN Solution Engine
IN-14
78-14092-01